Top Banner
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R007 Planning Guidelines Issue 05 Date 2009-09-15 Part Number 31400819 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209

53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Oct 30, 2014

Download

Documents

Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

V100R007

Planning Guidelines

Issue 05

Date 2009-09-15

Part Number 31400819

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Page 2: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Page 3: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Overview of Planning...............................................................................................................1-11.1 Planning Items.................................................................................................................................................1-21.2 References.......................................................................................................................................................1-3

2 Planning Network Layers.........................................................................................................2-12.1 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................2-22.2 Network Layers for the OptiX OSN Equipment.............................................................................................2-22.3 Interconnection to Other OptiX Equipment....................................................................................................2-3

2.3.1 Interconnection Abilities........................................................................................................................2-32.3.2 Interconnection to the OptiX OSN Series Equipment...........................................................................2-42.3.3 Interconnection to the OptiX DWDM Series Equipment......................................................................2-52.3.4 Interconnection to the OptiX Metro Series Equipment..........................................................................2-7

2.4 Network Management Abilities of the T2000 and the Computation of the Abilities.....................................2-7

3 Planning Networking................................................................................................................3-13.1 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................3-23.2 NE Types Supported by the Equipment..........................................................................................................3-2

3.2.1 TM..........................................................................................................................................................3-33.2.2 ADM.......................................................................................................................................................3-33.2.3 MADM...................................................................................................................................................3-43.2.4 REG........................................................................................................................................................3-5

3.3 Networking Modes Supported by the Equipment...........................................................................................3-7

4 Planning Network Protection..................................................................................................4-14.1 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................4-34.2 Network Protection Schemes Supported by the Equipment...........................................................................4-34.3 Planning the MSP Ring...................................................................................................................................4-4

4.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the MSP Ring..............................................................................................4-44.3.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................4-5

4.4 Planning the SNCP..........................................................................................................................................4-64.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the SNCP.....................................................................................................4-64.4.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................4-6

4.5 Planning the 1+1 Linear MSP.........................................................................................................................4-74.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Linear MSP....................................................................................4-7

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines Contents

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 4: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

4.5.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................4-74.6 Planning the 1:N Linear MSP.........................................................................................................................4-8

4.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1:N Linear MSP....................................................................................4-84.6.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................4-8

4.7 Planning the DNI Protection...........................................................................................................................4-94.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the DNI Protection......................................................................................4-94.7.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................4-9

4.8 Planning the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection........................................................................................4-94.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection...................................................4-94.8.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................4-10

4.9 Planning the Optical-Path-Shared MSP........................................................................................................4-104.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Optical-Path-Shared MSP...................................................................4-104.9.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................4-10

4.10 Planning the Ethernet RPR Protection........................................................................................................4-114.10.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Ethernet RPR Protection...................................................................4-114.10.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................4-12

4.11 Planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring Protection Schemes for the ATM Service........................................4-124.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ring Protection Schemes for the ATM Service...4-124.11.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................4-134.11.3 Planning Examples.............................................................................................................................4-13

5 Planning the DCN......................................................................................................................5-15.1 DCN Schemes Supported by the Equipment..................................................................................................5-25.2 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................5-35.3 Planning NE IDs..............................................................................................................................................5-35.4 Planning the HWECC.....................................................................................................................................5-4

5.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the HWECC................................................................................................5-45.4.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................5-4

5.5 Planning the IP over DCC...............................................................................................................................5-55.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the IP over DCC..........................................................................................5-55.5.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................5-6

5.6 Planning the OSI over DCC............................................................................................................................5-65.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the OSI over DCC.......................................................................................5-75.6.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................5-75.6.3 Planning Cases.......................................................................................................................................5-9

6 Planning Services.......................................................................................................................6-16.1 Basic Planning Principles................................................................................................................................6-36.2 Maximum Service Access Capacity................................................................................................................6-3

6.2.1 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................................6-36.2.2 Slot Access Capacity..............................................................................................................................6-46.2.3 Cross-Connect Capacity.........................................................................................................................6-5

6.3 Planning SDH Services...................................................................................................................................6-66.3.1 Capability of Supporting SDH Services.................................................................................................6-6

ContentsOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

ii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 5: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6.3.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................6-86.4 Planning Long-Haul Optical Transmission.....................................................................................................6-9

6.4.1 Capability of Supporting Long-Haul Optical Transmission..................................................................6-96.4.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-10

6.5 Planning PDH Services.................................................................................................................................6-116.5.1 Capability of Supporting PDH Services...............................................................................................6-116.5.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-13

6.6 Planning Ethernet Services............................................................................................................................6-136.6.1 Capability of Supporting Ethernet Services.........................................................................................6-136.6.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-206.6.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted EPL Services.............................................................................6-216.6.4 Planning Port-Shared EPL Services.....................................................................................................6-236.6.5 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EPL Services........................................................................................6-246.6.6 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services.....................................................................................6-266.6.7 Planning EVPL Services (Transmit Scheme)......................................................................................6-286.6.8 Planning EPLAN Services...................................................................................................................6-296.6.9 Planning EVPLAN Services................................................................................................................6-31

6.7 Planning RPR Services..................................................................................................................................6-336.7.1 Capability of the OptiX OSN 2500 of Supporting RPR Services........................................................6-336.7.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-356.7.3 Planning EVPL Services for RPR Boards............................................................................................6-366.7.4 Planning EVPLAN Services for RPR Boards......................................................................................6-38

6.8 Planning ATM and IMA Services.................................................................................................................6-416.8.1 Capability of Supporting the ATM and IMA Services........................................................................6-426.8.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-436.8.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted ATM Services............................................................................6-446.8.4 Planning Multicast ATM Services.......................................................................................................6-466.8.5 Planning Statistically Multiplexed ATM Services...............................................................................6-486.8.6 Planning IMA Services........................................................................................................................6-51

6.9 Planning SAN and Video Services................................................................................................................6-546.9.1 Capability of Supporting SAN and Video Services.............................................................................6-546.9.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-556.9.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted SAN Services.............................................................................6-55

6.10 Planning DDN Services..............................................................................................................................6-566.10.1 Capability of Supporting DDN Services............................................................................................6-576.10.2 Plannig Principles...............................................................................................................................6-576.10.3 Planning N x 64 kbit/s Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)........................................................6-586.10.4 Planning Framed E1 Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)............................................................6-596.10.5 Planning N x 64 kbit/s and Framed E1 Services (Hybrid Transmission)..........................................6-606.10.6 Planning Converged Framed E1 Services..........................................................................................6-616.10.7 Planning Converged N x 64 kbit/s Services.......................................................................................6-63

6.11 Planning WDM Services.............................................................................................................................6-64

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines Contents

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 6: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6.11.1 Capability of Supporting WDM Services..........................................................................................6-646.11.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................6-65

7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection...................................................................................7-17.1 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................7-37.2 Capabilities of Supporting Equipment-Level Protection................................................................................7-37.3 Planning the TPS Protection for the E1/T1 Service Boards............................................................................7-4

7.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E1/T1 Service Boards.......................................7-47.3.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................7-57.3.3 Planning Cases....................................................................................................................................... 7-5

7.4 Planning the TPS Protection for the E3/T3 Service Boards............................................................................7-67.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E3/T3 Service Boards.......................................7-67.4.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................7-67.4.3 Planning Cases....................................................................................................................................... 7-7

7.5 Planning the TPS Protection for the E4 Service Boards.................................................................................7-87.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E4 Service Boards............................................7-87.5.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................7-87.5.3 Planning Cases....................................................................................................................................... 7-9

7.6 Planning the TPS Protection for the STM-1 Electrical Interface Service Boards...........................................7-97.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the STM-1 Electrical Interface Service Boards......7-97.6.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................7-107.6.3 Planning Cases.....................................................................................................................................7-10

7.7 Planning the TPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards...................................................................................7-107.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards..............................................7-117.7.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................7-117.7.3 Planning Cases.....................................................................................................................................7-11

7.8 Planning the BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards...........................................................................7-127.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards......................................7-127.8.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................7-127.8.3 Planning Cases.....................................................................................................................................7-13

7.9 Planning the 1+1 Protection for the ATM Boards........................................................................................7-137.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Protection for the ATM Boards...................................................7-137.9.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................7-147.9.3 Planning Cases.....................................................................................................................................7-14

7.10 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN Service.....................................................................................7-147.10.1 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN Service ...........................................................................7-157.10.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................7-157.10.3 Planning Cases...................................................................................................................................7-15

7.11 Planning the TPS Protection for the Hybrid Service...................................................................................7-167.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the Hybrid Service..............................................7-167.11.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................7-167.11.3 Planning Cases...................................................................................................................................7-16

8 Planning Clocks..........................................................................................................................8-1

ContentsOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 7: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

8.1 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................8-28.2 Capabilities of Supporting Clocks...................................................................................................................8-28.3 Planning Examples..........................................................................................................................................8-3

9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces......................................................................9-19.1 Planning Orderwire Phone Interfaces..............................................................................................................9-2

9.1.1 Capability of Supporting Orderwire Phone Interfaces...........................................................................9-29.1.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................9-29.1.3 Planning Example..................................................................................................................................9-3

9.2 Planning Broadcast Data Interfaces S1–S4.....................................................................................................9-39.2.1 Capability of Supporting Broadcast Data Interfaces..............................................................................9-39.2.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................9-49.2.3 Planning Example..................................................................................................................................9-4

9.3 Planning External Alarm Interfaces................................................................................................................9-59.3.1 Capability of Supporting External Alarm Interfaces..............................................................................9-69.3.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................9-6

10 Planning Hardware................................................................................................................10-110.1 Planning the Cabinet...................................................................................................................................10-2

10.1.1 Cabinet...............................................................................................................................................10-210.1.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................10-4

10.2 Planning Slots for Boards............................................................................................................................10-410.2.1 Slot Allocation....................................................................................................................................10-510.2.2 Planning Principles...........................................................................................................................10-14

10.3 Planning Interface Boards.........................................................................................................................10-1610.3.1 Planning Interface Boards................................................................................................................10-1610.3.2 Planning Principles...........................................................................................................................10-24

11 Planning Environment for Operation................................................................................11-111.1 Power Consumption of the Equipment.......................................................................................................11-211.2 Environment for Operation.........................................................................................................................11-211.3 Planning Principles......................................................................................................................................11-4

12 Overview of Network Optimization..................................................................................12-112.1 Purpose of Network Optimization...............................................................................................................12-212.2 Principles for Optimizing the Network.......................................................................................................12-212.3 Process for Optimizing a Network..............................................................................................................12-2

A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1

B Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................B-1

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines Contents

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 8: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05
Page 9: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figures

Figure 2-1 Grooming ability of the OptiX OSN 2500.........................................................................................2-2Figure 2-2 Hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 2500 and other equipment.....................................................2-4Figure 2-3 Hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 2500 and other OSN series equipment..................................2-5Figure 2-4 Interconnection of the OptiX OSN 2500 to the OptiX WDM equipment through SDH interfaces...............................................................................................................................................................................2-6Figure 2-5 Interconnection of the OptiX OSN 2500 to the OptiX WDM equipment through GE interfaces...............................................................................................................................................................................2-6Figure 3-1 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 TM NE.........................3-3Figure 3-2 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 ADM NE......................3-4Figure 3-3 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 and STM-4 MADM NE...............................................................................................................................................................................3-5Figure 3-4 Hybrid application of the ADM and REG supported by the OptiX OSN 2500.................................3-6Figure 3-5 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-4 ADM and an STM-16 REG...............................................................................................................................................................................3-7Figure 4-1 Two low-rate line units sharing the same high-rate line unit...........................................................4-10Figure 4-2 Two line units with the same rate sharing the same line unit...........................................................4-11Figure 4-3 VP-Ring protection for the ATM services.......................................................................................4-14Figure 5-1 Planning of the DCN network in the OSI over DCC mode................................................................5-9Figure 6-1 Access capacity of each slot before division of the three slots...........................................................6-5Figure 6-2 Access capacity of each slot after division of the three slots.............................................................6-5Figure 6-3 Networking diagram for transparently transmitted EPL services.....................................................6-22Figure 6-4 Networking diagram for port-shared EPL services..........................................................................6-23Figure 6-5 Application scheme for port-shared EPL services............................................................................6-24Figure 6-6 Networking diagram for the VCTRUNK-shared EPL services.......................................................6-25Figure 6-7 Networking diagram for VCTRUNK-shared EPL services.............................................................6-25Figure 6-8 Networking diagram for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.....................................................6-27Figure 6-9 Application scheme for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services......................................................6-27Figure 6-10 Networking diagram for EVPL services (Transmit scheme).........................................................6-28Figure 6-11 Networking diagram for the EPLAN service.................................................................................6-30Figure 6-12 Networking diagram for the EVPLAN service..............................................................................6-32Figure 6-13 Networking diagram for the EVPL services on an RPR................................................................6-37Figure 6-14 Networking diagram for EVPLAN services on an RPR................................................................6-39Figure 6-15 Networking diagram for EVPLAN services on an RPR................................................................6-40Figure 6-16 Figure 6-19 Networking diagram for transparent transmission of ATM services..........................6-44

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines Figures

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 10: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-17 Figure 6-20 Networking diagram for the multicast ATM services................................................6-46Figure 6-18 Networking diagram for the statistically multiplexed ATM services............................................6-49Figure 6-19 Networking diagram for the IMA services.....................................................................................6-52Figure 6-20 Networking diagram for transparently transmitting SAN services................................................6-55Figure 6-21 Networking diagram for the N x 64 kbit/s service (point-to-point transmission)..........................6-58Figure 6-22 Networking diagram for the framed E1 service (point-to-point transmission)..............................6-59Figure 6-23 Networking diagram for the framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/s services (hybrid transmission)............6-60Figure 6-24 Networking diagram for the converged framed E1 service............................................................6-62Figure 6-25 Networking diagram for the converged N x 64 kbit/s services......................................................6-63Figure 7-1 TPS configuration for the E1/T1 service before the division of slots................................................7-5Figure 7-2 TPS configuration for the E1 service after the division of slots.........................................................7-6Figure 7-3 Configuration of the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service (1) .........................................................7-7Figure 7-4 Configuration of the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service (2) .........................................................7-8Figure 7-5 TPS configuration for the E4 service..................................................................................................7-9Figure 7-6 TPS configuration for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards..............................................7-10Figure 7-7 TPS configuration for the Ethernet boards.......................................................................................7-11Figure 7-8 Configuration of the BPS and PPS protection schemes for the EMS4 and EGS4 boards...............7-13Figure 7-9 Configuration of the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards................................................................7-14Figure 7-10 TPS configuration for the DDN service.........................................................................................7-15Figure 7-11 TPS configuration for the hybrid service .......................................................................................7-17Figure 8-1 Configuration of clocks in the chain network.....................................................................................8-3Figure 8-2 Configuration of clocks in the tangent rings network........................................................................8-4Figure 8-3 Configuration of clocks in the intersecting rings network..................................................................8-4Figure 9-1 Planning the orderwire phone interfaces............................................................................................9-3Figure 9-2 Application of the broadcast data interfaces.......................................................................................9-5Figure 10-1 Appearance of the ETSI cabinet.....................................................................................................10-3Figure 10-2 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (before the division of slots)....................................10-5Figure 10-3 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (before the division of slots)............................10-5Figure 10-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (after the division of slots).......................................10-6Figure 10-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (after the division of slots)...............................10-6

FiguresOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 11: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Tables

Table 1-1 Planning items of the OptiX OSN 2500...............................................................................................1-2Table 2-1 List of management ability coefficients on different hardware platforms...........................................2-8Table 3-1 Boards that support the REG function.................................................................................................3-6Table 3-2 Optical interface types that support the REG function........................................................................ 3-6Table 3-3 Networking modes and topologies supported by the OptiX OSN 2500..............................................3-7Table 4-1 Network protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500....................................................... 4-4Table 4-2 Capability of supporting the MSP rings of the OptiX OSN 2500........................................................4-5Table 4-3 OptiX OSN 2500 paired slots.............................................................................................................. 4-5Table 4-4 Requirements for the ATM services at each node.............................................................................4-14Table 4-5 ATM service routes in the VP-Ring protection mode.......................................................................4-15Table 5-1 DCC resource allocation of the OptiX OSN 2500...............................................................................5-2Table 6-1 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500................................................................6-4Table 6-2 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500................................................................................. 6-6Table 6-3 SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features......................................................................6-6Table 6-4 Optical booster amplifier units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features........................................6-9Table 6-5 Dispersion compensation units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.....................................6-10Table 6-6 PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features....................................................................6-11Table 6-7 Features of the N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 boards.....................................6-13Table 6-8 Features of the N1EGS2 and N2EGS2 boards...................................................................................6-16Table 6-9 Features of the N1EGT2, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A and R1EFT4 boards................................................6-17Table 6-10 Features of the EMS4 and EGS4 boards..........................................................................................6-18Table 6-11 Service routes for the transparently transmitted EPL services.........................................................6-22Table 6-12 Service routes for the port-shared EPL services..............................................................................6-24Table 6-13 Routes for the VCTRUNK-shared EPL services.............................................................................6-26Table 6-14 Routes for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services..........................................................................6-28Table 6-15 Service routes for the EVPL services (Transit scheme)...................................................................6-29Table 6-16 Routes for the EPLAN service.........................................................................................................6-31Table 6-17 Routes for the EVPLAN service......................................................................................................6-33Table 6-18 Ethernet RPR boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features....................................................6-33Table 6-19 Routes for the EVPL services of the RPR boards............................................................................6-38Table 6-20 Routes of the EVPLAN services for the RPR boards......................................................................6-41Table 6-21 Features of the ADL4 and ADQ1....................................................................................................6-42Table 6-22 Features of the IDL4 and IDQ1.......................................................................................................6-42

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines Tables

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Page 12: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Table 6-23 Routes for transparently transmitted ATM services........................................................................6-45Table 6-24 Routes for multicast ATM services..................................................................................................6-47Table 6-25 Requirements for statistically multiplexing ATM services.............................................................6-48Table 6-26 Routes for the statistically multiplexed ATM services....................................................................6-50Table 6-27 Requirements for IMA services among the nodes...........................................................................6-51Table 6-28 IMA service routes...........................................................................................................................6-53Table 6-29 Services supported by the N1MST4 and their rates.........................................................................6-55Table 6-30 Routes for transparently transmitted SAN services.........................................................................6-56Table 6-31 Features of the N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA............................................................................6-57Table 6-32 Routes for the N x 64 kbit/s service (point-to-point transmission)..................................................6-59Table 6-33 Routes for the framed E1 service (point-to-point transmission)......................................................6-60Table 6-34 Routes for the 4 x 64 kbit/s and the framed E1 service (hybrid transmission)................................6-61Table 6-35 Routes for the converted framed E1 services...................................................................................6-62Table 6-36 Routes for the converged N x 64 kbit/s services..............................................................................6-64Table 7-1 Capabilities of supporting equipment-level protection........................................................................7-3Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.................................................................................10-3Table 10-2 Technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets...............................................................10-4Table 10-3 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards for the OptiX OSN2500.....................................................................................................................................................................10-7Table 10-4 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 2500.....................................................................10-7Table 10-5 Sequence for planning slots for boards..........................................................................................10-14Table 10-6 Interfaces of SDH processing boards.............................................................................................10-16Table 10-7 Interfaces of PDH processing boards.............................................................................................10-18Table 10-8 Interfaces of data processing boards..............................................................................................10-20Table 10-9 Interfaces of DDN processing boards............................................................................................10-22Table 10-10 Interfaces of WDM processing boards.........................................................................................10-22Table 10-11 Interfaces of the optical power booster amplifier and dispersion compensation units................10-23Table 10-12 Interfaces of auxiliary boards.......................................................................................................10-23Table 10-13 Principles for planning STM-16 optical interfaces......................................................................10-24Table 10-14 Principles for Planning STM-4 Optical Interfaces.......................................................................10-25Table 10-15 Principles for Planning STM-1 Optical Interfaces.......................................................................10-26Table 11-1 Power supply specifications.............................................................................................................11-2Table 11-2 Requirements for temperature and humidity....................................................................................11-2Table 11-3 Other climate requirements..............................................................................................................11-3Table 11-4 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance...................................................11-3Table 11-5 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation..........................................11-3Table 11-6 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation.....................................................................11-4

TablesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 13: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes the OptiX OSN 2500 in terms of the following aspects:

l Position in a network

l Networking ability

l Service capability

l Capability of supporting protection schemes

l Capability of supporting the clock and orderwire

l Planning principles

l Process for network optimization

This document serves as a guide to plan the OptiX OSN 2500.

Related VersionsThis document is organized as follows.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 2500 V100R007

Intended AudienceThe intended audience of this document is network planning engineer.

OrganizationThis document consists of eight chapters and is organized as follows.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines About This Document

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

Page 14: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Chapter Description

1 Overview of Planning This chapter describes the planning items and references forthe planning of the OpiX OSN 2500.

2 Planning Network Layers This chapter describes the network layer for the OptiX OSN2500, principles for planning network layers, ability of theOptiX OSN 2500 to interconnect to other OptiX equipment,and ability of the T2000 to manage the OptiX OSN 2500.

3 Planning Networking This chapter describes the principles for planningnetworking, and the NE types and networking modessupported by the OptiX OSN 2500.

4 Planning NetworkProtection

This chapter describes the basic principles for planningnetwork protection schemes and the network protectionschemes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500.

5 Planning the DCN This chapter describes the HWECC, IP over DCC and OSIover DCC protocols supported by the OptiX OSN 2500, andthe principles for planning the DCN.

6 Planning Services This chapter describes the basic principles for planningservices, the service access capability, and the planning ofservices.

7 Planning Equipment-LevelProtection

This chapter describes the equipment-level protectionschemes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500 and theprinciples for planning equipment-level protectionschemes.

8 Planning Clocks This chapter describes the basic principles for planningclocks, and the abilities of the OptiX OSN 2500 to processclocks and to protect clocks.

9 Planning Orderwire andAuxiliary Interfaces

This chapter describes the capabilities of the OptiX OSN2500 of supporting the orderwire phone, S1–S4 datainterfaces and alarm interfaces. This chapter also describesthe principles for planning orderwire and auxiliaryinterfaces.

10 Planning Hardware This chapter describes the principles for planning thecabinet, slots and interfaces for the OptiX OSN 2500.

11 Planning Environment forOperation

This chapter describes the principles for planning theoperation environment, and the power consumption andenvironment requirements for operation.

12 Overview of NetworkOptimization

This chapter describes the purposes, principles and briefprocess for optimizing a network.

A Glossary This appendix lists the terms used in this document.

B Acronyms andAbbreviations

The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used inthis document.

About This DocumentOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 15: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Conventions

Symbol ConventionsThe following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if notavoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, andperformance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or saveyour time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize orsupplement important points of the main text.

General ConventionsConvention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. Forexample, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command ConventionsConvention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] areoptional.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines About This Document

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

Page 16: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Convention Description

{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square bracketsand separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all canbe selected.

GUI ConventionsConvention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are inboldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. Forexample, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard OperationFormat Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means thethree keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keysshould be pressed in turn.

Mouse OperationAction Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly withoutmoving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certainposition.

About This DocumentOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 17: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Update HistoryUpdates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document versioncontains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Based on Product Version V100R007This document is the fifth release for the V100R007 product version. The updated contents areas follows:

Power Consumption of the Equipment: The max. power consumption is fixed.

Planning Interface Boards: The connectors of the PDH processing boards and auxiliary boardsare fixed.

Updates in Issue 04 (2008-05-31) Based on Product Version V100R007This document is the fourth release for the V100R007 product version. The updated contentsare as follows:

Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R007l Related information on the N3EGS4 is added in section 6.6 "Planning Ethernet Services",

section 7.2 "Capabilities of Supporting Equipment-Level Protection", section 7.8 "PlanningBPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards" and section 10.2 "Planning Slots for Boards."

l Information on the ASON clock function is added in section 8.2 "Capabilities of SupportingClocks."

l In section 10.2.2 "Planning Principles", information on the sequence of planning slots forboards is rectified.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Based on Product Version V100R007This document of the V100R007 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01, issue02 has the following revised or optimized content.

l In section 11.1 "Power Consumption of the Equipment", the Max. power consumption andcurrent are rectified.

l The mapping relation between boards and slots is optimized in section 10.2.1 "SlotAllocation".

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Based on Product Version V100R007This document of the V100R007 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R006,this version has the following new or optimized content:l The document structure is optimized.

l The description of how to plan the SNCTP is added.

l Section 2.4 is added to describe the network management abilities of the T2000 and thecomputation of the abilities.

l Chapter 5 is added to describe how to plan the DCN.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines About This Document

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5

Page 18: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Chapter 10 is added to describe how to plan hardware.

l Chapter 11 is added to describe how to plan environment for operation.

l Chapter 12 is added to describe the overview of network optimization.

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R006The bug about the transparent transmission of the NM information through section overheadsis fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-01-10) Based on Product Version V100R006Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2006-09-20) Based on Product Version V100R006This document of the V100R006 version is of the first release.

Updates in Issue 03 (2006-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005With update naming of version, fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version.

Updates in Issue 02 (2006-06-20) Based on Product Version V100R005The former manual version is T2-040237-20060620-C-1.51.

The updated contents are as follows.

Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2006-03-20) Based on Product Version V100R005The former manual version is T2-040237-20060320-C-1.51.

This document of the V100R005 version is of the first release.

About This DocumentOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 19: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

1 Overview of Planning

About This Chapter

When planning the network, consider the network layers, networking modes, and networkprotection schemes, and refer to relevant documents.

1.1 Planning ItemsWhen planning the OptiX OSN 2500, plan the network layers, services, protection schemes, andclocks.

1.2 ReferencesWhen planning the OptiX OSN 2500, refer to the documents that involve the product featuresof the OptiX OSN 2500.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 1 Overview of Planning

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

Page 20: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

1.1 Planning ItemsWhen planning the OptiX OSN 2500, plan the network layers, services, protection schemes, andclocks.

Table 1-1 lists the planning items of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 1-1 Planning items of the OptiX OSN 2500

Item Chapter Description

Planningnetworklayers

2 Planning Network Layers This chapter describes the network layersfor the OptiX OSN 2500, principles forplanning network layers, ability of theOptiX OSN 2500 to interconnect to otherOptiX equipment, and ability of theT2000 to manage the OptiX OSN 2500.

Planningnetworking

3 Planning Networking This chapter describes the principles forplanning networking, and the NE typesand networking modes supported by theOptiX OSN 2500.

Planningnetworkprotectionschemes

4 Planning Network Protection This chapter describes the basicprinciples for planning networkprotection schemes and the networkprotection schemes supported by theOptiX OSN 2500.

Planning theDCNnetwork

5 Planning the DCN This chapter describes the HWECC, IPover DCC and OSI over DCC protocolssupported by the OptiX OSN 2500, andthe principles for planning the DCN.

Planningservices

6 Planning Services This chapter describes the basicprinciples for planning services, theservice access capability, and theplanning of services.

Planningequipment-levelproteciton

7 Planning Equipment-LevelProtection

This chapter describes the equipment-level protection supported by the OptiXOSN 2500 and the principles for planningequipment-level protection.

Planningclocks

8 Planning Clocks This chapter describes the basicprinciples for planning clocks, and theabilities of the OptiX OSN 2500 toprocess clocks and to protect clocks.

1 Overview of PlanningOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 21: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Item Chapter Description

Planningorderwire andauxiliaryinterfaces

9 Planning Orderwire andAuxiliary Interfaces

This chapter describes the capabilities ofthe OptiX OSN 2500 of supporting theorderwire phone, S1–S4 data interfacesand alarm interfaces. This chapter alsodescribes the principles for planningorderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

Planninghardware

10 Planning Hardware This chapter describes the principles forplanning the cabinet, slots and interfacesfor the OptiX OSN 2500.

Planningenvironmentfor operation

11 Planning Environment forOperation

This chapter describes the principles forplanning the operation environment, andthe power consumption and environmentrequirements for operation.

NOTE

During the planning of a transmission network, you should first collect and analyze service requirements,and then analyze the existing network information and determine the network capacity. After that, youshould plan the T2000. The operations mentioned in this note are not described in this document.

1.2 ReferencesWhen planning the OptiX OSN 2500, refer to the documents that involve the product featuresof the OptiX OSN 2500.

References:

l OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description

l OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 1 Overview of Planning

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

Page 22: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05
Page 23: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

2 Planning Network Layers

About This Chapter

When planning the network layers, follow the basic principles, and consider the network layersfor the equipment, interconnection to other OptiX equipment, and network management abilitiesof the T2000.

2.1 Basic PrinciplesWhen planning the layers of the transmission network, consider the necessity to layer thenetwork, rationality of layering the network, and functions of each layer.

2.2 Network Layers for the OptiX OSN EquipmentThe OptiX OSN 2500 is an intelligent optical switching platform, which mainly serves as aservice grooming node at the backbone layer of the metropolitan area network (MAN). Thus, itcompletes the grooming and transmission of services of multiple types and differentgranularities.

2.3 Interconnection to Other OptiX EquipmentOptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to other Huawei OptiX equipment to provide an integratedtransmission network solution.

2.4 Network Management Abilities of the T2000 and the Computation of the AbilitiesThe T2000 performs management and maintenance operations on the OptiX OSN 2500. Duringthe network planning, consider the management abilities of the T2000 to select the hardwareand management domains of the T2000.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 2 Planning Network Layers

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

Page 24: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

2.1 Basic PrinciplesWhen planning the layers of the transmission network, consider the necessity to layer thenetwork, rationality of layering the network, and functions of each layer.l Necessity to layer the network

l Rationality of layering the network

l Functions of each layer, such as grooming, accessing and convergence

l Interworking with data and service networks

l Coverage of networks and services

l Future evolution of networks and services

l Rationality of the capacity of each layer

l Traffic equilibrium at each station

2.2 Network Layers for the OptiX OSN EquipmentThe OptiX OSN 2500 is an intelligent optical switching platform, which mainly serves as aservice grooming node at the backbone layer of the metropolitan area network (MAN). Thus, itcompletes the grooming and transmission of services of multiple types and differentgranularities.l At the convergence and access layer, the OptiX OSN 2500 can form a ring, chain, HUB,

ring with chain, intersecting rings, tangent rings, DNI or mesh network at the STM-16,STM-4, or STM-1 level.

l The maximum higher order cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 is 20 Gbit/s,and the maximum lower order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s. Thus, at the access orconvergence layer, the OptiX OSN 2500 can groom services at different rates. Figure2-1 shows the grooming ability of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Figure 2-1 Grooming ability of the OptiX OSN 2500

STM-4ring

OptiX OSN2500

STM-64

STM-16 ring STM-16ring

OptiX OSN 3500

MSTP SDH

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN OptiX OSNOptiX OSN OptiX OSN

2500

STM-4ringSTM-1

ring

STM-1ring

PDH:E1/T1/E3/T3/E4SDH:STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64Ethernet:10M/100M/1000MATM:155M/622MSAN:FC/FICON/ESCON/DVB

Access2500

2500

OptiX OSN 2500OptiX OSN2500

2500

OptiX OSN3500

Backbonelayer

Convergencelayer

Access layer

Service:

Grooming

Service

AccessAccess

Access

2 Planning Network LayersOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 25: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

2.3 Interconnection to Other OptiX EquipmentOptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to other Huawei OptiX equipment to provide an integratedtransmission network solution.

2.3.1 Interconnection AbilitiesThe OptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to the Huawei OptiX OSN, DWDM and Metro seriesequipment to provide an integrated transmission network solution.

2.3.2 Interconnection to the OptiX OSN Series EquipmentOptiX OSN 2500 is connected to other OptiX OSN series equipment to construct a hybridnetwork, which can complete an integrated intelligent solution from the backbone layer,convergence layer, to the access layer.

2.3.3 Interconnection to the OptiX DWDM Series EquipmentOptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to the OptiX DWDM equipment through SDH or GEinterfaces.

2.3.4 Interconnection to the OptiX Metro Series EquipmentOptiX OSN 2500 can connect to the OptiX Metro series equipment through SDH, PDH, Ethernet,ATM and DDN interfaces.

2.3.1 Interconnection AbilitiesThe OptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to the Huawei OptiX OSN, DWDM and Metro seriesequipment to provide an integrated transmission network solution.

Figure 2-2 shows the application of the integrated MAN network where the OptiX OSN 2500is interconnected to other equipment.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 2 Planning Network Layers

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

Page 26: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 2-2 Hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 2500 and other equipment

DWDM

OptiX 10G

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 2500OptiX OSN 2500

iManager T2000/T2100

OptiX 10G

OptiX 10G

OptiX OSN 3500OptiX OSN

3500

OptiX OSN1500OptiX OSN

1500

OptiX OSN2500

OptiX OSN2500

OptiX OSN 2500

STM-64 ringSTM-64

ring

STM-16 ring STM-16 ring

STM-1/4 ring

STM-1/4ring

STM-1/4ring

MSTP MADM ADM

OptiX OSN 9500 DWDM

Backbone layer

Convergence layer

Access layer

NOTE

When the OptiX OSN 2500 is interconnected to the third party equipment, contact Huawei engineers.

2.3.2 Interconnection to the OptiX OSN Series EquipmentOptiX OSN 2500 is connected to other OptiX OSN series equipment to construct a hybridnetwork, which can complete an integrated intelligent solution from the backbone layer,convergence layer, to the access layer.

The OptiX OSN series equipment consists of the OptiX OSN 9500, OptiX OSN 7500, OptiXOSN 3500, OptiX OSN 3500T, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG and OptiX OSN 1500.

There are no restraints when the OptiX OSN 2500 is interconnected to other OptiX OSN seriesequipment.

Figure 2-3 shows the application of the hybrid networking where the OptiX OSN 2500 isconnected to other OptiX OSN series equipment.

2 Planning Network LayersOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 27: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 2-3 Hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 2500 and other OSN series equipment

OptiX OSN 9500

OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 7500

OptiX OSN 3500OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 2500OptiX OSN 1500

GSM/CDMA/WCDMA Ethernet SANPSTN ATM. . .

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)

EthernetStorage Area Network (SAN)

Backbone layer

Convergence layer

Access layer

2.3.3 Interconnection to the OptiX DWDM Series EquipmentOptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to the OptiX DWDM equipment through SDH or GEinterfaces.

The OptiX DWDM series equipment consists of the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX Metro 6100,and OptiX Metro 6040.

Interconnection Through SDH InterfacesIn the case of interconnection through SDH interfaces, if fixed wavelength optical modulescompliant with ITU-T G.694.1 and ITU-T G.694.2 are used, the OptiX WDM multiplex anddemultiplex units can be directly accessed without using a specific OTU. As shown in Figure2-4, the OTU is specified in the dashed area.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 2 Planning Network Layers

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

Page 28: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 2-4 Interconnection of the OptiX OSN 2500 to the OptiX WDM equipment through SDHinterfaces

OptiX OSN 2500 WDM equipment

OTU OM and OD

FOA

FOA

Tx

Rx

Rx

Tx

STM-16

STM-16

SF16/SL16

Fixed optical attenuator (FOA)Optical transponder unit (OTU)

Optical multiplexer (OM) Optical demultiplexer (OD)

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the SF16 and SL16 boards support fixed wavelength opticalmodules compliant with G.694.1 and G.694.2 and can directly interconnect to the OptiX WDMequipment. For specifications of optical modules of the SF16 and SL16 boards, refer to theOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description. Forspecifications of optical modules of boards on the OptiX WDM equipment, refer to the OptiXWDM equipment manuals.

Interconnection Through GE InterfacesIn the case of interconnection through GE interfaces, the interconnected OptiX WDM equipmentshould provide an OTU with a specific wavelength to perform the wavelength conversion.Figure 2-5 shows the interconnection through GE interfaces.

Figure 2-5 Interconnection of the OptiX OSN 2500 to the OptiX WDM equipment through GEinterfaces

OptiX OSN 2500 WDM equipment

OTU OM and OD

FOA

FOA

Tx

Rx

Rx

Tx

GE

GE

EGS2/EGT2/EMS4/EGS4/EMR0/EGR2

Fixed optical attenuator (FOA)Optical transponder unit (OTU)

Optical multiplexer (OM) Optical demultiplexer (OD)

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the EGS2, EGT2, EMS4, EGS4, EMR0 and EGR2 boardscan interconnect to the OptiX WDM equipment through GE interfaces. For specifications ofoptical modules of the EGS2, EGT2, EMS4, EGS4, EMR0 and EGR2 boards, refer to the OptiX

2 Planning Network LayersOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 29: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description. For specificationsof optical modules of the OTU on the OptiX WDM equipment, refer to the OptiX WDMequipment manuals.

2.3.4 Interconnection to the OptiX Metro Series EquipmentOptiX OSN 2500 can connect to the OptiX Metro series equipment through SDH, PDH, Ethernet,ATM and DDN interfaces.

The OptiX Metro series equipment consists of the OptiX 10G(Metro5000), OptiX 2500+(Metro3000), OptiX 155/622(Metro2050), OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000).

l In the case of the SDH, PDH, ATM, and DDN services, there are no constraints when theOptiX OSN 2500 interconnects to the OptiX Metro series equipment.

l In the case of the Ethernet service, the OptiX OSN 2500 cannot interconnect to the boardsfor the OptiX 2500+(Metro3000) that takes the ML-PPP as the encapsulation protocol. Whenthe OptiX OSN 2500 interconnects to other Ethernet boards for the OptiX 2500+(Metro3000) or OptiX 10G(Metro5000), there are no constraints.

2.4 Network Management Abilities of the T2000 and theComputation of the Abilities

The T2000 performs management and maintenance operations on the OptiX OSN 2500. Duringthe network planning, consider the management abilities of the T2000 to select the hardwareand management domains of the T2000.

Number of the OptiX OSN 2500 NEs Managed by the T2000One set of the T2000 software can manage OptiX OSN 2500 NEs as follows:

l A maximum of 444 OptiX OSN 2500 NEs on which the ASON features are enabled

l A maximum of 571 OptiX OSN 2500 NEs on which the ASON features are not enabled

Computation Formulas for the Management AbilitiesComputation formulas for the management abilities of the T2000 are as follows:

l Formula one: Number of the maximum manageable STM-1 NEs = 1000 x Managementability coefficient of the hardware platform

l Formula two: Number of the maximum manageable NEs = Number of the maximummanageable STM-1 NEs ÷ Coefficient of the NEs equivalent to the STM-1 NEs

Computation Methods for the Management AbilitiesThe management abilities of the T2000 refer to the number of the maximum manageable NEswhen the specified performance specifications are met. At present, a set of T2000 software canmanage a maximum of 2000 STM-1 NEs.

When the T2000 manages networks composed of different types of NEs, the managementabilities can be computed from the preceding data. During the computation, the following factorsshould be considered:

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 2 Planning Network Layers

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-7

Page 30: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l The number of fibers and services can be different for different types of NEs, and thus thesize of the databases varies. In this case, the coefficients of different types of NEs equivalentto the STM-1 NEs can be computed. The coefficient of the OptiX OSN 2500 equivalent tothe STM-1 NEs is 4.5 (with the ASON features) or 3.5 (without the ASON features).

l Different hardware platforms affect the management abilities of the T2000, especially theT2000 server. The client can also be affected. See Table 2-1.

l If the client and server are running on the same computer, the management abilities can bereduced by 50%. Thus, the client and the server should run on separate computers. In thiscase, the effect of the client on the management abilities of the server can be disregarded.

Table 2-1 List of management ability coefficients on different hardware platforms

Hardware Platform ManagementAbilityCoefficient

Maximum Number ofAccessed Clients

SUN Netra240 0.6 16

SUN Netra240 dual node 0.6 16

SUN Fire V890 (2CPU) 1 24

SUN Fire V890 (4CPU) 1.5 32

Fujitsu PW 650 (2CPU) 1 24

Fujitsu PW 650 (4CPU) 1.5 35

SUN Fire E4900 2 32

DELL PE 6800 1.5 32

DELL PE 2900 1 24

DELL PE 840 0.6 16

2 Planning Network LayersOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 31: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

3 Planning Networking

About This Chapter

When planning the networking, follow the basic principles, and consider the NE types andnetworking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500.

3.1 Basic PrinciplesWhen planning the transmission network, consider the line structure, service type, and servicerequirement.

3.2 NE Types Supported by the EquipmentIn a network, OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured as different types of NEs, including TM,ADM, MADM, REG, and a combination of these NE types.

3.3 Networking Modes Supported by the EquipmentOptiX OSN 2500 supports networking modes, such as the chain, ring, tangent rings, intersectingrings, ring with chain, DNI, HUB, and mesh, at the STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 levels.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 3 Planning Networking

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

Page 32: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

3.1 Basic PrinciplesWhen planning the transmission network, consider the line structure, service type, and servicerequirement.

Adhere to the following principles:

l Consider the line structure, service type, service flow and protection requirements as awhole. Thus, services can be fully protected through networking planning and dataconfiguration.

l Use the ring topology as the network topology type. When the ASON features are enabled,use the mesh topology.

l In the case of the intersecting rings, use high-rate equipment at the junction nodes to avoidservice bottlenecks during the timeslot configuration, service upgrade, and serviceexpansion. For example, in the case of the STM-4 intersecting rings, use the STM-64equipment at the junction nodes.

l The DNI is mainly used on intersecting rings, at gateway nodes with great service capacity,and for connecting tandem offices. The primary advantage of the DNI is to provideprotection when node failures occur.

l Configure less than 20 nodes in a ring network to avoid performance degrade of clocktracing caused by excessive nodes.

l Choose a proper service rate for the network according to the existing service capacity anddemands of future network expansion.

l Determine the equipment type of each node according to the network topology, servicecapacity of the node, and equipment features.

3.2 NE Types Supported by the EquipmentIn a network, OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured as different types of NEs, including TM,ADM, MADM, REG, and a combination of these NE types.

3.2.1 TMWhen configuring the OptiX OSN 2500 as a TM NE, install an optical interface board in thecorresponding slot in the subrack as the line board, and install the integrated board of thetributary, line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units, PIU board, and auxiliary interface board.

3.2.2 ADMWhen configuring the OptiX OSN 2500 as an ADM NE, install two optical interface boards inthe corresponding slots in the subrack as the line boards, and install the integrated board of thetributary, line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units, PIU board, and auxiliary interface board.

3.2.3 MADMThe OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured as an MADM NE when combined with ADMs at therates ranging from STM-1 to STM-16.

3.2.4 REGThe OptiX OSN 2500 equipment can use a line board to regenerate signals.

3 Planning NetworkingOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 33: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

3.2.1 TMWhen configuring the OptiX OSN 2500 as a TM NE, install an optical interface board in thecorresponding slot in the subrack as the line board, and install the integrated board of thetributary, line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units, PIU board, and auxiliary interface board.

Figure 3-1 shows the hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16TM NE.

l Configure one CXL16 board to transmit and receive STM-16 signals. The CXL16 can alsorealize the system control and communication, service cross-connection and system timing.In addition, two CXL16 boards can be used to realize the 1+1 hot backup for the cross-connect, timing, and SCC units.

l Configure one PQ1 board and two D75S interface boards to transmit and receive the E1signals.

l Configure two PIU boards to access the –48 V power. The two PIU boards serve as a mutualbackup for each other.

l Configure one AUX board and one SAP board to provide various auxiliary interfaces.l Configure two FAN boards to dissipate heat for the equipment.l Insert boards into other slots on the equipment according to the service requirements.

Figure 3-1 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 TM NE

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5/19

SLOT6/20

SLOT7/21

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

PQ1

D75

S

SAP

D75

S

NOTE

Slots 5–7 of the OptiX OSN 2500 can be divided into two half-height slots respectively, which can housethe STM-1 or STM-4 optical interface boards (half-height). After the slots are divided, the slots in the lowerportion are slots 5–7, and the slots in the upper portion are slots 19–21.

3.2.2 ADMWhen configuring the OptiX OSN 2500 as an ADM NE, install two optical interface boards inthe corresponding slots in the subrack as the line boards, and install the integrated board of thetributary, line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units, PIU board, and auxiliary interface board.

Figure 3-2 shows the hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16ADM NE.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 3 Planning Networking

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

Page 34: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Configure two CXL16 boards to transmit and receive STM-16 signals. The CXL16 boardscan also realize the system control and communication, service cross-connection andsystem timing. In addition, the CXL16 boards can be used to realize the 1+1 hot backupfor the cross-connect, timing, and SCC units.

l Configure one PQ1 board and two D75S interface boards to transmit and receive the E1signals.

l Configure two PIU boards to access the –48 V power. The two PIU boards serve as a mutualbackup for each other.

l Configure one SEI board and one SAP board to provide various auxiliary interfaces.

l Configure two FAN boards to dissipate heat for the equipment.

l Insert boards into other slots on the equipment according to the service requirements.

Figure 3-2 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 ADM NE

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5/19

SLOT6/20

SLOT7/21

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

PQ1

D75

S

SAP

D75

S

3.2.3 MADMThe OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured as an MADM NE when combined with ADMs at therates ranging from STM-1 to STM-16.

Figure 3-3 shows the hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16and STM-4 MADM NE.

l Configure two CXL16 boards to realize the ADM function for the STM-16 signals, systemcontrol and communication, service cross-connection, and system timing. In addition, theCXL16 boards realize the 1+1 hot backup for the cross-connect, timing, and SCC units.

l Configure four SL4 boards to complete the ADM function for the STM-4 signals.

l Configure one PQ1 board and two D75S interface boards to transmit and receive the E1signals.

l Configure two PIU boards to access the –48 V power. The two PIU boards serve as a mutualbackup for each other.

l Configure one SEI board and one SAP board to provide various auxiliary interfaces.

l Configure two FAN boards to dissipate heat for the equipment.

3 Planning NetworkingOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 35: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Insert boards into other slots on the equipment according to the service requirements.

Figure 3-3 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 and STM-4MADM NE

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5/19

SLOT6/20

SLOT7/21

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

SL4

SL4

SL4

SL4

D75

S

D75

S

PQ1

3.2.4 REGThe OptiX OSN 2500 equipment can use a line board to regenerate signals.

NOTE

First enable the REG function of the line board on the T2000 to generate signals.

As shown in Figure 3-4, the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the hybrid application of the ADM andREG.

l Two SL16 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 form the REG, which connects to the uplinkand downlink SL16 boards.

l Two SL4 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 form the ADM, which connects to the uplinkand downlink SL4 boards.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 3 Planning Networking

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

Page 36: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 3-4 Hybrid application of the ADM and REG supported by the OptiX OSN 2500

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

REG

SL16 SL16IN

OUT

SL16IN

OUT

SL16

OptiX OSN 2500OUT

IN

SL4 SL4

IN

OUT

SL4IN

OUT

SL4

PQ1

ADM

OSNEquipment

OUT

IN

OSNEquipment

OSNEquipment

OSNEquipment

Table 3-1 lists the boards that support the REG function, and Table 3-2 lists the optical interfacesthat support the REG function.

Table 3-1 Boards that support the REG function

Board Function Description

N2SL16,N3SL16,N2SL16A,N3SL16A

In the REG mode, the board only processes the frame header and RSOH.

Table 3-2 Optical interface types that support the REG function

Board Optical Interface Type

N2SL16A,N3SL16A

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2

N2SL16, N3SL16 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je

Figure 3-5 shows the hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-4ADM NE and an STM-16 REG.

l Configure two CXL16 boards to realize the system control and communication, servicecross-connection, and system timing. The two CXL16 serve as a mutual backup for eachother.

3 Planning NetworkingOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 37: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Configure two SL4 boards to complete the ADM function for the STM-4 signals.

l Configure two SL16 boards to regenerate the optical signals at the STM-16 level.

l Configure one PQ1 board and two D75S interface boards to transmit and receive the E1signals.

l Configure two PIU boards to access the –48 V power. The two PIU boards serve as a mutualbackup for each other.

l Configure one SEI board and one SAP board to provide various auxiliary interfaces.

l Configure two FAN boards to dissipate heat for the equipment.

l Insert boards into other slots on the equipment according to the service requirements.

Figure 3-5 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-4 ADM andan STM-16 REG

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5/19

SLOT6/20

SLOT7/21

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

SL4

SL16

SL16

SL4

D75

S

D75

S

PQ1

STM-4ADM

2 x STM-16REG

3.3 Networking Modes Supported by the EquipmentOptiX OSN 2500 supports networking modes, such as the chain, ring, tangent rings, intersectingrings, ring with chain, DNI, HUB, and mesh, at the STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 levels.

Table 3-3 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 3-3 Networking modes and topologies supported by the OptiX OSN 2500

NetworkingMode

Topology

Chain

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 3 Planning Networking

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

Page 38: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

NetworkingMode

Topology

Ring

Tangent rings

Intersecting rings

Ring with chain

DNI

HUB

3 Planning NetworkingOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 39: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

NetworkingMode

Topology

Mesh

Note:

MADM ADM TM ASON NE

The OptiX OSN 2500 with the enabled ASON features supports the mesh network and thererouting protection scheme. Thus, the network reliability and bandwidth utilization can beenhanced.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 3 Planning Networking

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-9

Page 40: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05
Page 41: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

4 Planning Network Protection

About This Chapter

The network protection is provided for services in the entire network instead of a single NE. Thenetwork protection protects the SDH, Ethernet, and ATM services. Thus, proper planning canensure the effectiveness of the network protection.

4.1 Basic PrinciplesUsers can choose proper network protection schemes according to the features of networkprotection schemes and application scenarios.

4.2 Network Protection Schemes Supported by the EquipmentThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports network protection schemes for the SDH service, the Ethernetservice, and the ATM service.

4.3 Planning the MSP RingThe MSP ring, widely used in the SDH network, includes the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring,two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, and two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring.

4.4 Planning the SNCPThe SNCP, widely used in the SDH network, includes the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP.

4.5 Planning the 1+1 Linear MSPThe 1+1 linear MSP, used in the SDH chain network, has high switching speed, high reliability,and low bandwidth utilization.

4.6 Planning the 1:N Linear MSPThe 1:N linear MSP is used in the SDH chain network. One protection channel protects serviceson N working channels. However, two faulty working channels cannot be protected at the sametime. When all the channels are normal, the protection channel can carry extra services.

4.7 Planning the DNI ProtectionThe DNI protection can be configured on two interconnected nodes. The DNI protectionenhances the reliability of the services between the two rings.

4.8 Planning the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail ProtectionFor the fiber-shared virtual trail protection, two or multiple ring networks share the same fiber.The capacity of the fiber is classified and divided into different protection groups in VC-4granularities. Thus, multiple network protection schemes can be used in one optical fiber. The

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

Page 42: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

fiber-shared virtual trail protection enhances the survivability of the network and bandwidthutilization.

4.9 Planning the Optical-Path-Shared MSPFor the optical-path-shared MSP, two MSP groups can be configured into one optical interface.Thus, multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interfaces.

4.10 Planning the Ethernet RPR ProtectionThe RPR protection, used for the Ethernet, can coexist with the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, andSNCTP schemes at the SDH layer.

4.11 Planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring Protection Schemes for the ATM ServiceThe VP-Ring and VC-Ring, used for the ATM services, can coexist with the MSP, SNCP,SNCMP, and SNCTP schemes at the SDH layer.

4 Planning Network ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 43: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

4.1 Basic PrinciplesUsers can choose proper network protection schemes according to the features of networkprotection schemes and application scenarios.

Adhere to the following principles when planning network protection.

l At the access layer, the service capacity is small, and most services are converged at acentral node. Thus, the unidirectional SNCP ring is applicable.

l In the case of the inter-office communication, the service capacity of each node is large,and a larger service adding/dropping capability is required. Thus, the bidirectional MSPring is applicable.

l When services on the ring are discrete, the two-fiber bidirectional MSP is applicable. Inthe case of extreme situations, when services only travel between two adjacent nodes, themaximum service capacity on the ring is STM-N x K/2 ( "K" represents the number ofnodes). In this case, the resource utilization is large. However, the MSP, which needs thesupport of the automatic protection switching (APS) protocol, has complex protectionmechanisms and strict network maintenance requirements.

l The MSP can protect node failures.

l The optical-path-shared MSP ring protects services in VC-4 granularities. This protectionscheme is used for services of a large volume. Generally, this scheme is used for the servicesat the STM-64 and STM-16 levels.

l The SNCP scheme is applied to protect services at the VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 level. Hence,the SNCP scheme has more flexibility.

l The SNCP is the 1+1 protection, and the SNCMP is the N+1 protection, in which multipleprotection channels protect one working channel.

l The SNCTP scheme is applied to protect services at the VC-4 path. When the workingchannel is faulty, services are switched to the protection channels.

l The SNCTP is mainly used at the backbone layer and the convergence layer. Compared tothe MSP, the SNCTP requires a simplified network topology.

l In the case of the inter-ring and ring with chain services, the SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP orMSP is applicable.

l Protection schemes for the chain network include the 1+1 linear MSP and the 1:N linearMSP. In the case of 1:N linear MSP, protection routes can carry extra services. Thus, thenetwork utilization is enhanced. When rapid service restoration after the switching isrequired, the 1+1 protection is applicable.

l The DNI is mainly used on intersecting rings and at gateway nodes with great servicecapacity, or used for connecting tandem offices. The primary advantage of the DNI is thatit provides protection when multi-node failures occur.

4.2 Network Protection Schemes Supported by theEquipment

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports network protection schemes for the SDH service, the Ethernetservice, and the ATM service.

Table 4-1 lists the network protection schemes supported by the 2500.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

Page 44: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Table 4-1 Network protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500

Protection Level Protection Scheme

SDH network protection MSP

SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP

1+1 linear MSP

1:N linear MSP

DNI protection

Fiber-shared virtual trail protection

Optical-path-shared MSP

Network protection for theEthernet service

Resilient package ring (RPR) protectionin the Ethernet network

Network protection for the ATMservice

VP-Ring, VC-Ring network protection

4.3 Planning the MSP RingThe MSP ring, widely used in the SDH network, includes the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring,two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, and two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring.

4.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the MSP RingWhen planning the MSP ring for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities ofsupporting the MSP ring.

4.3.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the MSP ring, the planning principles should be followed.

4.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the MSP RingWhen planning the MSP ring for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities ofsupporting the MSP ring.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the following types of MSP rings.

l Four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

l Two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

l Two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring

The MSP ring of the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the following functions.

l The MSP ring supports the in-service MS bandwidth expansion without interruptingservices (for example, upgrading the MSP ring at the STM-4 level to the MSP ring at theSTM-16 level).

l Boards that carry STM-16 services support configuring a single optical interface into amaximum of two MSP rings.

4 Planning Network ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 45: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l The MSP ring supports the MS suppression at the VC-4 level.

l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports a maximum of 12 MSP protection ring groups.

Table 4-2 lists the maximum number of MSP rings at the STM-4 and STM-16 levels on theoptical interface board for the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 4-2 Capability of supporting the MSP rings of the OptiX OSN 2500

Protection Scheme Maximum Number ofProtection Rings

Four-fiber MSP ring at the STM-16 level 1

Two-fiber MSP ring at the STM-16 level 3

Four-fiber MSP ring at the STM-4 level 6

Two-fiber MSP ring at the STM-4 level 12

4.3.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the MSP ring, the planning principles should be followed.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the MSP ring.

l The number of nodes on an MSP ring should not exceed 16.

l On the bidirectional MSP ring, services are configured on half of the VC-4 channels, andthe other half of the VC-4 channels are used as protection channels. If extra services areconfigured on the protection channels, these services are unavailable when protectionswitching occurs.

l When configuring an MSP ring, insert the two boards that form the ring into paired slots.The paired slots are listed in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 OptiX OSN 2500 paired slots

Slot DivisionStatus

Paired Slots

Before division ofslots

(Slot 6, Slot 13)(Slot 7, Slot 12)(Slot 8, Slot 11)(Slot 9, Slot 10)

After division ofslots

(Slot 5, Slot 19)(Slot 6, Slot 20)(Slot 7, Slot 21)(Slot 8, Slot 11)(Slot 9, Slot 10)

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

Page 46: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l On an MSP ring, do not form an ADM NE by using different optical interfaces on the samemultichannel optical interface board. Otherwise, services in the two directions of the ADMare unavailable at the same time, when the board fails.

l When using the multichannel optical interface board to form an MSP ring, use the opticalinterfaces with the same sequence number on the two boards that form the ring.

l It is recommended that you set the WTR time of the MSP ring to 600s.

l It is recommended that you set the B2_SD as the trigger condition of the MSP ringprotection switching.

4.4 Planning the SNCPThe SNCP, widely used in the SDH network, includes the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP.

4.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the SNCPWhen planning the SNCP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of supportingthe SNCP.

4.4.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the SNCP, the planning principles should be followed.

4.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the SNCPWhen planning the SNCP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of supportingthe SNCP.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the SNCP, SNCMP, andSNCTP schemes are listed as follows:

l In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the SDH processing boards at the STM-16, STM-4,and STM-1 levels all support the SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.

l The SNCP function of the OptiX OSN 2500 is compliant with ITU-T G.841 and G.842.

l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports a maximum of 1184 SNCP groups. The SNCP groups areof the VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 level.

l The SNCMP of the OptiX OSN 2500 support a maximum of 3+1 multichannel SNCPschemes. In addition, it supports a maximum of 592 SNCMP protection groups.

l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports a maximum of 512 SNCTP groups. The SNCTP protectiongroup is of the VC-4 level. In addition, the SNCTP tunnel can carry services of the VC-4,VC-3 or VC-12 level.

4.4.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the SNCP, the planning principles should be followed.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the SNCP.

l In the case of the ring and ring with chain networks at the STM-1 level, the SNCP isrecommended if the services on the ring are centralized.

l When the SNCP and the MSP coexist, set the hold-off time of the SNCP longer than theswitching time (50 ms) of the MSP to avoid the interference between the SNCP and theMSP.

4 Planning Network ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 47: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l In the DNI networking, the primary and secondary nodes of the SNCP, SNCMP, andSNCTP should be correctly set on the ring in the same direction.

l In the DNI networking, the SNCP and linear MSP schemes cannot be used on the chain atthe same time.

l The WTR time of the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP should be set to 600s.

l The SNCTP can coexist with the MSP ring. The SNCTP can share the sink and then cancoexist with the SNCP and SNCMP. The SNCTP does not support the coexistence withthe linear MS.

l The SNCMP feature and the ASON feature conflict with each other. If a node is configuredwith the SNCMP feature, the ASON feature cannot be configured for the node. If a nodeis configured with the ASON feature, the SNCMP feature cannot be configured for thenode.

l The SNCMP cannot coexist with the MS ring and linear MS.

4.5 Planning the 1+1 Linear MSPThe 1+1 linear MSP, used in the SDH chain network, has high switching speed, high reliability,and low bandwidth utilization.

4.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Linear MSPWhen planning the 1+1 linear MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities ofsupporting the 1+1 linear MSP.

4.5.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the 1+1 linear MSP, the planning principles should befollowed.

4.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Linear MSPWhen planning the 1+1 linear MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities ofsupporting the 1+1 linear MSP.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the 1+1 MSP are as follows:

l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the 1+1 MSP at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, and STM-1levels.

l An OptiX OSN 2500 system supports a maximum of 12 1+1 linear MSP groups.

l The switching and bridging mode supports the single-ended and dual-ended switchings.

l The switching revertive mode supports the revertive mode and non-revertive mode.

4.5.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the 1+1 linear MSP, the planning principles should befollowed.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the 1+1 linear MSP.

l Do not use different optical interfaces on one multichannel optical interface board to formthe 1+1 protection group. Otherwise, the protection function is unavailable when the boardfails.

l The switching and bridging mode should be set to the single-ended switching.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

Page 48: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l The switching revertive mode should be set to the non-revertive mode.

l It is recommended that you set the B2_SD as the trigger condition of the linear MSP ringprotection switching.

4.6 Planning the 1:N Linear MSPThe 1:N linear MSP is used in the SDH chain network. One protection channel protects serviceson N working channels. However, two faulty working channels cannot be protected at the sametime. When all the channels are normal, the protection channel can carry extra services.

4.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1:N Linear MSPWhen planning the 1:N linear MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities ofsupporting the 1:N linear MSP.

4.6.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the 1:N linear MSP, the planning principles should befollowed.

4.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1:N Linear MSPWhen planning the 1:N linear MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities ofsupporting the 1:N linear MSP.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the 1:N linear MSP at the following levels:

l 1:N (1≤N≤14) linear MSP at the STM-16 level

l 1:N (1≤N≤14) linear MSP at the STM-4 level

l 1:N (1≤N≤14) linear MSP at the STM-1 level

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the 1:N linear MSP are asfollows:

l An OptiX OSN 2500 system supports a maximum of 12 1:N linear MSP groups.

l The switching and bridging mode is the dual-ended switching.

l The switching revertive mode is the revertive.

4.6.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the 1:N linear MSP, the planning principles should befollowed.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the 1:N linear MSP.

l Do not use different optical/electrical interfaces on the same multichannel optical/electricalinterface board to form a 1:N protection group. Otherwise, the protection function isunavailable when the board fails.

l In the 1:N protection scheme, the protection route can carry extra services, but the extraservices cannot be protected.

l It is recommended that you set the WTR time of the linear MSP ring to 600s.

l It is recommended that you set the B2_SD as the trigger condition of the linear MSP ringprotection switching.

4 Planning Network ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 49: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

4.7 Planning the DNI ProtectionThe DNI protection can be configured on two interconnected nodes. The DNI protectionenhances the reliability of the services between the two rings.

4.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the DNI ProtectionWhen planning the DNI protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities ofsupporting the DNI protection.

4.7.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the DNI protection, the planning principles should be followed.

4.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the DNI ProtectionWhen planning the DNI protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities ofsupporting the DNI protection.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the DNI protection compliant with ITU-T G.842.

4.7.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the DNI protection, the planning principles should be followed.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the DNI protection.

l The DNI network combines the ring network and the chain network. Two rings in a DNInetwork can be configured with the SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP or MSP.

l The chain that connects the two rings can be configured with the DNI protection or thefiber-shared virtual trail protection.

4.8 Planning the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail ProtectionFor the fiber-shared virtual trail protection, two or multiple ring networks share the same fiber.The capacity of the fiber is classified and divided into different protection groups in VC-4granularities. Thus, multiple network protection schemes can be used in one optical fiber. Thefiber-shared virtual trail protection enhances the survivability of the network and bandwidthutilization.

4.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail ProtectionWhen planning the fiber-shared virtual trail protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first considerthe capabilities of supporting the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.

4.8.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the fiber-shared virtual trail protection, the planning principlesshould be followed.

4.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Fiber-Shared Virtual TrailProtection

When planning the fiber-shared virtual trail protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first considerthe capabilities of supporting the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports two MSP rings sharing the same section of fiber.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

Page 50: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

4.8.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the fiber-shared virtual trail protection, the planning principlesshould be followed.

For details, see 4.9 Planning the Optical-Path-Shared MSP.

4.9 Planning the Optical-Path-Shared MSPFor the optical-path-shared MSP, two MSP groups can be configured into one optical interface.Thus, multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interfaces.

4.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Optical-Path-Shared MSPWhen planning the optical-path-shared MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider thecapabilities of supporting the optical-path-shared MSP.

4.9.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the optical-path-shared MSP protection, the planningprinciples should be followed.

4.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Optical-Path-Shared MSPWhen planning the optical-path-shared MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider thecapabilities of supporting the optical-path-shared MSP.

In the case of the optical-path-shared MSP, one optical interface can be configured into twoMSP groups. Thus, multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the configuration of the optical-path-shared MSP.

l The SF16 and SL16 boards can process two sets of K bytes, which are located in the firstand fifth STM-1s. The SF16 and SL16 boards support configuring a single optical interfaceinto a maximum of two MSP rings.

4.9.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the optical-path-shared MSP protection, the planningprinciples should be followed.

In normal situations, in the case of the optical-path-shared MSP, two low-rate line units sharethe same high-rate line unit. See Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Two low-rate line units sharing the same high-rate line unit

STM-4

STM-4

STM-16

MSP ring 1

MSP ring 2

4 Planning Network ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

4-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 51: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

In the optical-path-shared MSP, two line units at the same rate can share the same line unit. SeeFigure 4-2. In this case, the STM-16 line units of the MSP ring 1 and MSP ring 2 can only addpartial VC-4s into the MSP ring groups.

Figure 4-2 Two line units with the same rate sharing the same line unit

STM-16

STM-16

STM-16

MSP ring 1

MSP ring 2

When the optical-path-shared MSP is configured, on the protection ring, the optical interfacesin two directions need not be configured into paired slots.

4.10 Planning the Ethernet RPR ProtectionThe RPR protection, used for the Ethernet, can coexist with the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, andSNCTP schemes at the SDH layer.

4.10.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Ethernet RPR ProtectionWhen planning the Ethernet RPR protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider thecapabilities of supporting the Ethernet RPR protection.

4.10.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the Ethernet RPR protection, the planning principles shouldbe followed.

4.10.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Ethernet RPR ProtectionWhen planning the Ethernet RPR protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider thecapabilities of supporting the Ethernet RPR protection.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the Ethernet RPR protectionare as follows:

l The EMR0 and EGR2 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 support the RPR ring defined byIEEE 802.17.

l The RPR ring can support a maximum of 255 nodes.

l The EVPL and EVPLAN services can be transmitted in the RPR ring network.

l The RPR ring network of the OptiX OSN 2500 supports three protection modes, wrapping,steering (default) and wrapping+steering. When the number of nodes on the ring is lessthan 16, the switching time of the steering mode is less than 50 ms.

l The RPR ring network of the OptiX OSN 2500 supports two protection revertive modes,revertive (default) and non-revertive. The protection revertive modes at the RPR nodes canbe different.

l The RPR protection can coexist with the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes forthe SDH layer.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-11

Page 52: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

4.10.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the Ethernet RPR protection, the planning principles shouldbe followed.

The RPR protection is applicable to the ring network. The RPR protection can rapidly restorethe Ethernet services when fiber cuts and link failures occur. The principles for planning theRPR protection are as follows:

l The number of the RPR nodes should not exceed 255.

l Before activating the protocol, set a valid node ID. The node ID should be unique in theentire network. Setting the node ID after activating the protocol can reactivate the protocol.

l The protection mode should be unique in the entire network. Select the protection modeaccording to the following rules:– When the number of nodes in the ring network is less than 16, the steering mode is

recommended. Thus, the switching time is kept less than 50 ms, and the bandwidth isefficiently used.

– When the network is of a large scale, the wrapping+steering mode is recommended.Thus, the switching time is kept less than 50 ms, the packet loss is reduced, and thebandwidth is efficiently used.

l The bandwidth of the RPR ring network should be planned in a network wide scale. Thebandwidth of the ring A0 service should be smaller than the overall bandwidth of the ring.Otherwise, the alarm indicating the reserved bandwidth crossing is reported.

l When the protection for the SDH layer and the RPR protection coexist, the hold-off timeof the RPR protection switching should be set. It is recommended that you set the hold-offtime to 200 ms. When the switching requirements are met, the protection for the SDH layershould be activated first.

4.11 Planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring ProtectionSchemes for the ATM Service

The VP-Ring and VC-Ring, used for the ATM services, can coexist with the MSP, SNCP,SNCMP, and SNCTP schemes at the SDH layer.

4.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ring Protection Schemes for the ATMServiceWhen planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first considerthe capabilities of supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection.

4.11.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection, the planning principlesshould be followed.

4.11.3 Planning ExamplesThe planning of the VP-Ring protection for the ATM services is taken as an example.

4.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the VP-Ring and VC-RingProtection Schemes for the ATM Service

When planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first considerthe capabilities of supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection.

4 Planning Network ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

4-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 53: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

The ATM board for the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the ATM layer protection schemesrecommended by ITU-T I.630, including the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection schemes.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ringprotection schemes for the ATM services are as follows:

l The VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection schemes include the 1+1 protection and the 1:1protection.– In the case of the 1+1 protection, the switching occurs at the sink end of the service,

and the protection mode is the revertive mode.– In the case of the 1:1 protection, the switching occurs at both the source and sink ends

of the service, and the protection mode is the non-revertive mode.l The VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection schemes can coexist with the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP

and SNCTP protection schemes for the SDH layer.

4.11.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection, the planning principlesshould be followed.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection schemesfor the ATM services.

l It is recommended that you use the bidirectional MSP ring and VP-Ring/VC-Ring to formthe network. In this case, the VP-Ring or VC-Ring protection should be configured with ahold-off time, which should exceed 4s. When the switching conditions are met, activatethe protection for the SDH layer first. If the switching at the SDH layer fails, activate theVP-Ring or VC-Ring protection to realize the layered protection.

l In a network, when the VP-Ring or VC-Ring coexists with non-protection rings, the hold-off time should be set to 0s. In this case, the VP-Ring or VC-Ring protection is of the firstlevel protection.

l Other protection schemes for the SDH layer can be combined with the VP-Ring or VC-Ring. This configuration is not recommended because it is relatively complex and requiresgreater bandwidth.

4.11.3 Planning ExamplesThe planning of the VP-Ring protection for the ATM services is taken as an example.

Service RequirementsIn a city, the SDH network formed by NE 1, NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 carries the ATM services.The ATM services at NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 originate from the digital subscriber line accessmultiplexer (DSLAM). The ATM services should be transmitted to the ATM switch that servesas the central node NE 1.

The ATM switch that serves as the central node provides one 155 Mbit/s optical interface toaccess the ATM services from each node. The ATM services of each node are listed in Table4-4.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-13

Page 54: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Table 4-4 Requirements for the ATM services at each node

TransmissionType

Source NE and Interface SinkNE

Bandwidth

Point-to-point NE 2: provides the 155 Mbit/s POSinterface

NE 1 3 x 10 Mbit/s

Point-to-point NE 3: provides the 155 Mbit/s POSinterface

NE 1 2 x 20 Mbit/s

Point-to-point NE 4: provides the 155 Mbit/s POS and 34Mbit/s interfaces

NE 1 1 x 30 Mbit/s1 x 20 Mbit/s

The ATM services at each node are of the constant bit rate (CBR) type.

The ATM services should be protected.

Networking ProtectionThe ATM services should be protected by the VP-Ring protection, but the services at the SDHlayer are not provided with protection. See Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 VP-Ring protection for the ATM services

20M

NE 1

NE 2

NE 3

NE4

OptiX OSNequipment

ATM switch DSLAM

10M

10M

10M

20M

30M

20M

155M (1,0) (2,0)(3,0)

(4,0) (5,0)

(6,0) (7,0)

ATM working route

ATM protection route

(6,0)

(7,0)

(1,0)

(2,0)

(3,0)

(4,0)(5,0) (6,0)(7,0)

(1,0)(2,0)(3,0)

(1,0) (2,0)(3,0) (4,0)(5,0)

(6,0) (7,0)(4,0) (5,0)

(1,0) (2,0)(3,0) (4,0)(5,0) (6,0)(7,0)

Values in the bracketindicate (VPI, VCI)

Realization SchemesThe statistical multiplexing + VP-Ring protection scheme should be used.

4 Planning Network ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

4-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 55: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

On the working route, the ATM services accessed at NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 are statisticallymultiplexed into one VC-4. After that, they are converged at a port of the central node NE 1,and then transmitted to the ATM switch at the upper layer.

On the protection route, the ATM services accessed at NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 are statisticallymultiplexed into another VC-4. After that, they are converged at the port used in the precedingoperation of the central node NE 1, and then transmitted to the upper layer ATM switch.

The directions of the working route and the protection route are different.

Hardware ConfigurationConfigure one ADQ1 board for NE 1 to converge the ATM services at each node, and thentransmit the services to the upper layer ATM switch through a 155 Mbit/s port.

Configure one ADQ1 board for NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 respectively to access the ATM servicesfrom the end office of DSLAM.

When accessing the ATM services through the 34M optical interface of NE 4, use both the ADQ1and PL3 boards to access the 34 Mbit/s ATM services and to share the bandwidth on the ring.

Service RoutesTable 4-5 shows the working and protection routes at each node.

Table 4-5 ATM service routes in the VP-Ring protection mode

Route Type NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4

Working routefrom NE 1 to NE2

ATMexternal port1 (1–3, 0) ←→ATMinternal port1 (1–3, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 1)

10M service 1:ATM externalport 1 (1, 0) ←→ ATM internalport 1 (1, 0) ←→ VC-4 (No. 1)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 1(1–3, 0) ←→ATM internalport 2 (1–3, 0)←→ VC-4 (No.1)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 1 (1–3, 0) ←→ ATMinternal port 2 (1–3, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 1)

10M service 2:ATM externalport 2 (2, 0) ←→ ATM internalport 1 (2, 0) ←→ VC-4 (No. 1)

10M service 3:ATM externalport 3 (3, 0) ←→ ATM internalport 1 (3, 0) ←→ VC-4 (No. 1)

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-15

Page 56: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Protection routefrom NE 1 to NE2

ATMexternal port1 (1–3, 0) ←→ ATMinternal port2 (1–3, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 2)

10M service 1:ATM externalport 1 (1, 0) ←→ ATM internalport 2 (1, 0) ←→ VC-4 (No. 2)

- -

10M service 2:ATM externalport 2 (2, 0) ←→ ATM internalport 2 (2, 0) ←→ VC-4 (No. 2)

10M service 3:ATM externalport 3 (3, 0) ←→ ATM internalport 2 (3, 0) ←→ VC-4 (No. 2)

Working routefrom NE 1 to NE3

ATMexternal port1 (4–5, 0) ←→ ATMinternal port1 (4–5, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 1)

- 20M service 1:ATM externalport 1 (4, 0) ←→ ATM internalport 2 (4, 0) ←→ VC-4 (No. 1)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 1 (4–5, 0) ←→ ATMinternal port 2 (4–5, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 1)

20M service 2:ATM externalport 2 (5, 0) ←→ ATM internalport 2 (5, 0) ←→ VC-4 (No. 1)

Protection routefrom NE 1 to NE3

ATMexternal port1 (4–5, 0) ←→ ATMinternal port2 (4–5, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 2)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 3(4–5, 0) ←→ATM internalport 2 (4–5, 0)←→ VC-4 (No.2)

20M service 1:ATM externalport 1 (4, 0) ←→ ATM internalport 3 (4, 0) ←→ VC-4 (No. 2)

-

20M service 2:ATM externalport 2 (5, 0) ←→ ATM internalport 3 (5, 0) ←→ VC-4 (No. 2)

4 Planning Network ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

4-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 57: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Working routefrom NE 1 to NE4

ATMexternal port1 (6–7, 0) ←→ ATMinternal port1 (6–7, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 1)

- - 20M service 1:PL3 interface ←→ATM internalport 3 (6, 0) ←→ATM internal port2 (6, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 1)

30M service 1:ATM externalport 1 (7, 0) ←→ATM internal port2 (7, 0) ←→ VC-4

Protection routefrom NE 1 to NE4

ATMexternalport1 (6–7,0) ←→ ATMinternal port2 (6–7, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 2)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 3(6–7, 0) ←→ATM internalport 2 (6–7, 0)←→ VC-4 (No.2)

Pass-throughservice: ATMexternal port 4(6–7, 0) ←→ATM internalport 3 (6–7, 0)←→ VC-4 (No.2)

20M service 1:PL3 interface ←→ ATM internalport 4 (6, 0) ←→ATM internal port3 (6, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 2)

30M service 1:ATM externalport 1 (7, 0) ←→ATM internal port3 (7, 0) ←→ VC-4(No. 2)

NOTE

The external ATM port is also the external optical interface where ATM services are accessed.

The internal ATM port is the logical port VCTRUNK, which is the port used to connect the ATM processingmodule and the SDH cross-connect module.

The VP connection is used. The numbers in the brackets are values of the VPI and VCI. For example, (1,0) indicates that the VPI value is 1 and the VCI value is 0.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-17

Page 58: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05
Page 59: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

5 Planning the DCN

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 2500 can construct the DCN in three ways, HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSIover DCC. When planning the DCN, follow the basic principles and specific principles fordifferent construction modes.

5.1 DCN Schemes Supported by the EquipmentIn the SDH network, the T2000 communicates with NEs through the DCN, and thus the T2000can manage and maintain the NEs. The NEs in the DCN use the DCC bytes to communicatewith each other. The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSI over DCCto construct the DCN.

5.2 Basic PrinciplesWhen constructing the DCN, select proper communication protocols according to the actualnetworking situation, and follow the planning principles.

5.3 Planning NE IDsNE IDs are used to identify Huawei transmission equipment. Thus, the NE IDs should beconfigured when the DCN network uses the HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSI over DCCprotocols.

5.4 Planning the HWECCFor the HWECC, the data that supports the HWECC protocol is transmitted in the DCC. TheHWECC protocol, developed by Huawei, is a private communication protocol used for the DCNnetworking of the optical equipment.

5.5 Planning the IP over DCCFor the IP over DCC, the data that supports the TCP/IP protocol is transmitted in the DCC.

5.6 Planning the OSI over DCCFor the OSI over DCC, the data that supports the OSI protocol is transmitted in the DCC.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 5 Planning the DCN

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

Page 60: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

5.1 DCN Schemes Supported by the EquipmentIn the SDH network, the T2000 communicates with NEs through the DCN, and thus the T2000can manage and maintain the NEs. The NEs in the DCN use the DCC bytes to communicatewith each other. The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSI over DCCto construct the DCN.

The OptiX OSN 2500 can construct the DCN in the following ways:

l The HWECC protocol is used to transmit data through the DCC. It is a privatecommunication protocol developed by Huawei for the DCN networking of the opticalnetwork equipment.

l The IP over DCC indicates that the data transmitted through the DCC supports thetransmission control protocol and internet protocol (TCP/IP).

l The OSI over DCC indicates that the data transmitted through the DCC supports the opensystems interconnection (OSI) protocol.

As listed in Table 5-1, the Q2CXL for the OptiX OSN 2500 has four DCC resource allocationmodes.The default mode is mode 1. Mode 1 does not support the use of D4–D12 bytes as physicaltransmission channels.

Table 5-1 DCC resource allocation of the OptiX OSN 2500

DCC Allocation Q2CXL

Channel type Supports D1–D3 and D4–D12 channels.

Operationmode

Mode 1 Only supports 40 D1–D3 channels.

Mode 2 Supports 10 D1–D3 channels.Supports 10 D4–D12 channels.

Mode 3 Supports 22 D1–D3 channels.Supports 6 D4–D12 channels.

Mode 4 Supports 28 D1–D3 channels.Supports 4 D4–D12 channels.

Default protocol type D1–D3 D4–D12

HWECC IP

Default mode Mode 1

NOTE

When the OptiX OSN 2500 forms a hybrid network with equipment from other vendors that does notsupport the IP or OSI standard communication protocol, the hybrid network provides solutions oftransparent transmission through the DCC bytes and transparent transmission of the managementinformation through the Ethernet service channels.

5 Planning the DCNOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 61: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

5.2 Basic PrinciplesWhen constructing the DCN, select proper communication protocols according to the actualnetworking situation, and follow the planning principles.

The principles for planning the DCN are as follows:

l When the OptiX OSN 2500 constructs a network with other Huawei equipment, theHWECC or IP over DCC protocol is recommended. Use the same communication protocolin the entire DCN network.

l When the OptiX OSN 2500 constructs a hybrid network with equipment from othervendors, use the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC protocol according to the protocolsupported by the equipment from other vendors.

l The OptiX OSN 2500 constructs a hybrid network with equipment from other vendors. Inthis case, if the equipment from other vendors do not support the IP over DCC or OSI overDCC, use the DCC bytes or the Ethernet service channels to transparently transmit themanagement information.

l When a communication protocol is used to construct the DCN network, properly set theDCN network scale and divide the network according to the network situation. Thus, theeffect of large network scale on the DCN network can be reduced.

l The DCN network should be of the ring type to ensure the reliability of the networkcommunication. Thus, route protection can be provided when fiber cuts or NEabnormalities occur. If fibers of the equipment cannot form a ring, extra DCN channelsshould be constructed to form a ring, and thus the route protection function can be realized.

5.3 Planning NE IDsNE IDs are used to identify Huawei transmission equipment. Thus, the NE IDs should beconfigured when the DCN network uses the HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSI over DCCprotocols.

The principles for planning the NE IDs are as follows:

l The ID of each NE should be unique.

l In the same DCN network, the ID of each NE should be unique.

l An NE ID is 24 bits in binary, which can be divided into the former eight bits and the latter16 bits.

– The former eight bits indicate the extended ID (the default value is 9), also called thesubnet number, which identifies different subnets. The subnet number cannot be 0 or0xFF (255 in decimal).

– The latter 16 bits indicate the basic ID. The value of the basic ID cannot be 0 or 0xBFF0(49136 in decimal), or be greater than 0xBFF0.

l In the ring network, the NE IDs should be increased one by one in the same direction alongthe ring network.

l A complex network should be divided into rings and chains. First set IDs for NEs on thering from 1 to N, and then set the IDs for NEs on the chain as N+1, N+2,…

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 5 Planning the DCN

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

Page 62: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

5.4 Planning the HWECCFor the HWECC, the data that supports the HWECC protocol is transmitted in the DCC. TheHWECC protocol, developed by Huawei, is a private communication protocol used for the DCNnetworking of the optical equipment.

5.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the HWECCThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the HWECC.

5.4.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen constructing the DCN by using the HWECC, follow the basic planning principles andprinciples for planning the NE IDs, NE IP addresses, and gateway NEs.

5.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the HWECCThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the HWECC.

After the NE IDs in the network are set, the ECC communication is available without othersettings.

The HWECC of the OptiX OSN 2500 supports communication through fibers or Ethernet cables.When no optical routes are available between nodes, set the extended ECC through Ethernetcables.

5.4.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen constructing the DCN by using the HWECC, follow the basic planning principles andprinciples for planning the NE IDs, NE IP addresses, and gateway NEs.

Basic Principles

The HWECC protocol is mainly used to construct the DCN between Huawei transmissionequipment. Adhere to the following principles when planning the HWECC.

l When the OptiX OSN 2500 or other Huawei OptiX OSN series equipment is used as thegateway NE, there should be less than 100 NEs in each HWECC subnet. When the OptiX10G (Metro5000) , OptiX 2500+ (Metro3000) is used as the gateway NE, there should be lessthan 50 NEs in each HWECC subnet.

l The HWECC subnet should be of the ring type to ensure that the route protection is availablewhen fiber cuts or NE abnormalities occur.

l The ECC communication should not be performed between different HWECC subnets.

l The OptiX OSN 2500 automatically assigns ECC channels to each SDH board. As thenumber of the ECC channels is restrained by the equipment, the unnecessary ECC channelsshould be shut down.

l The number of nodes for each gateway NE is limited. Thus, when the number of nodesexceeds the limit, mutiple gateway NEs can be configured.

l In normal situations, do not manually configure the ECC routes.

l When the extended ECC is required for communication, manually configure the extendedECC. The ECC should not be automatically extended. Thus, the bandwidth between NEs,which uses the ECC for communication, can be saved.

5 Planning the DCNOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 63: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Principles for Plannig NE IDsFor details, see 5.3 Planning NE IDs.

Principles for Planning IP AddressesThe IP address is used for communication between gateway NEs and the T2000. Thus, thegateway NEs should be configured with IP addresses. In addition, NEs that use the extendedECC functions should be configured with IP addresses.

In normal situations, the IP addresses of NEs need not manually configured. The IP addressesvary with the NE IDs. The format of the IP address is "129.E.A.B". "E" represents the extendedID of the NE (The value is 9 by default), and "A.B" represents the former eight bits and the lattereight bits. When the IP addresses are manually configured, the mapping relation between the IPaddresses and the IDs is unavailable.

By default, the subnet IP address is "129.9.0.0", and the subnet mask is "255.255.0.0".

Principles for Planning Gateway NEsAdhere to the following principles when planning the gateway NEs.

l Correctly set the IP addresses and subnet masks for the gateway NEs.

l Only the equipment connected to the T2000 through cables can be configured as gatewayNEs.

l In actual networking, the traffic volume of the gateway NEs is large. NEs with large ECCmanagement abilities should be configured as gateway NEs to ensure stablecommunication. In addition, gateway NEs should form a star network with other NEs toreduce the traffic volume of other NEs.

l It is recommended that you select a standby gateway NE to ensure the stability of thenetwork connection. The standby gateway NE should meet the requirements for the activegateway NE. In addition, the standby gateway NE can manage a portion of NEs, and theactive and standby gateway NEs mutually back up one another. Thus, the network stabilitycan be ensured.

5.5 Planning the IP over DCCFor the IP over DCC, the data that supports the TCP/IP protocol is transmitted in the DCC.

5.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the IP over DCCThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the IP over DCC, which is realized by the TCP/IP protocol.

5.5.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen constructing the DCN by using the IP over DCC, follow the basic planning principles andprinciples for planning the NE IDs and NE IP addresses.

5.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the IP over DCCThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the IP over DCC, which is realized by the TCP/IP protocol.

l The NEs can be accessed to the T2000 through the gateway NEs or be directly accessed tothe T2000.

l The TCP/IP application protocols, such as the FTP, Telnet, and SNMP, can be supported.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 5 Planning the DCN

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

Page 64: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l The open shortest path first (OSPF) dynamic routing protocol and static routing protocolare supported.

Through the IP over DCC, the OptiX OSN 2500 can form a hybrid DCN network with equipmentfrom other vendors that supports the IP over DCC.

5.5.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen constructing the DCN by using the IP over DCC, follow the basic planning principles andprinciples for planning the NE IDs and NE IP addresses.

Basic PrinciplesThe IP over DCC is mainly used for managing the hybrid network composed of the OptiX OSN2500 and equipment from other vendors that supports the IP over DCC. The IP over DCC is alsoused for managing the network composed of Huawei transmission equipment. Adhere to thefollowing principles when planning the IP over DCC.

l In the same OSPF area, the number of NEs should not exceed 60.

l When the T2000 is used to manage the NEs, the number of non-gateway NEs accessed bythe same gateway NE should not exceed 60 (It is recommended that the number does notexceed 50.)

Principles for Plannig NE IDsFor details, see 5.3 Planning NE IDs.

Principles for Planning IP AddressesAdhere to the following principles when planning the IP addresses.

l The IP address of each NE should be unique.

l NEs can use the standard IP address types A, B, and C, in which the IP addresses of NEsrange from "1.0.0.1" to "223.255.255.254". However, the broadcast addresses, networkaddresses and address "127.x.x.x" cannot be used. The subnet addresses "192.168.x.x" and"192.169.x.x" cannot be used.

l The IP addresses should work with the subnet masks, and they should support subnet masksthat have variable length.

l When the NEs directly access the T2000 by using the static routing protocol, it isrecommended that the gateway NEs and non-gateway NEs use different IP subnets.

l If two networks are connected through the Ethernet, they should be in different IP subnets.Thus, all NEs can be accessed through the T2000 when the network is divided into areas.

5.6 Planning the OSI over DCCFor the OSI over DCC, the data that supports the OSI protocol is transmitted in the DCC.

5.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the OSI over DCCThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the OSI over DCC, which is realized by using the lower fourlayers of protocols in the OSI standard seven-layer protocols.

5.6.2 Planning Principles

5 Planning the DCNOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 65: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

When constructing the DCN by using the OSI over DCC, follow the basic planning principlesand principles for planning the NE IDs, dividing network areas, selecting gateway NEs, andconfiguring roles of the LAPD of optical interfaces.

5.6.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the address and node type, and how to select gateway NEsin the DCN network areas.

5.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the OSI over DCCThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the OSI over DCC, which is realized by using the lower fourlayers of protocols in the OSI standard seven-layer protocols.

l The OptiX OSN 2500 uses the format of the simple network service access point (NSAP)address as the node protocol identification.

l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports three types of nodes, the end system (ES), level 1Intermediate systems (L1-IS), and level 2 intermediate systems (L2-IS).

l The IS-IS protocol is used between ISs to dynamically exchange the routing information.l The ES-IS protocol is used between the ES and the IS to perform the labor discovery and

to exchange the routing information.l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the IS-IS Level 2 protocol to realize route layering.l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the TP4 protocol.l NEs can be accessed to the T2000 through the gateway NEs or be directly accessed to the

T2000.

Through the OSI over DCC, the OptiX OSN 2500 can form the hybrid DCN network withequipment from other vendors that supports the OSI over DCC.

5.6.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen constructing the DCN by using the OSI over DCC, follow the basic planning principlesand principles for planning the NE IDs, dividing network areas, selecting gateway NEs, andconfiguring roles of the LAPD of optical interfaces.

Basic PrinciplesThe features of the OSI over DCC communication are mainly used for managing the hybridnetwork constructed by the OptiX OSN 2500 and equipment from other vendors. When thenetwork is constructed only by Huawei transmission equipment, the OSI over DCC is notrecommended.

Only nodes at the network terminal can be configured as the ES. The functions of the ES routingare limited, which prevents network expansion. Thus, it is not recommended that you configurethe equipment as the ES during the networking. Huawei T2000 is operating as a node of the ESnetwork.

By default, the L1-IS is the node type of Huawei equipment, which only supports the intra-arearouting (Level 1 Routing).

If the equipment supports the inter-area routing (Level 2 Routing), the node type of the networkshould be configured as the L2-IS. The L2-IS maintains two routing tables. One of the tworouting tables is used for the intra-area routing, and the other is used for the inter-area routing.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the IS-IS Level 2 routing functions. When the OSIcommunication protocol is used, the network should be divided into areas according to the

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 5 Planning the DCN

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

Page 66: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

network scale. In the entire DCN network, the number of areas cannot exceed 32. The numberof NEs in the same area cannot exceed 50.

The DCN network should be constructed as a ring network to provide route protection whenfiber cuts or NE abnormalities occur.

When the network is constructed by the OptiX OSN 2500 and equipment from other vendors,the network planning should be based on the design principles for equipment from other vendors.

Principles for Plannig NE IDsFor details, see 5.3 Planning NE IDs.

Dividing Network AreasThe OSI protocol supports the functions of route layering. It uses the SYS ID to realize the intra-area routing, and the AREA ID to realize the inter-area routing. When planning the DCNnetwork, properly divide the areas and assign the number of NEs in each area according to thetopology situation of the network.

In the case of a small-scale network with less than 50 NEs, there is no need to divide the networkinto areas. In this case, set the node types of all NEs to the L1-IS, and set the same AREA ID tothe NSAPs of all NEs.

In the case of a large-scale network, divide the network according to the following principles:

l Divide the DCN network into multiple areas to facilitate management.

l In each area, select multiple NEs to function as the L2-IS. It is recommended that you selecttwo NEs that mutually back up each other, in each area.

l In the entire DCN network, all L2 equipment should be consecutive.

Selecting Gateway NEsWhen the OSI over DCC is used to create the DCN, create the TP4 connection between theT2000 and the gateway NEs. The management data transmitted by the T2000 to the non-gatewayNEs should be forwarded by the gateway NEs. When creating the gateway NEs on the T2000interface, enter the NE IDs and specify the NSAP addresses. When creating the non-gatewayNEs, enter the NE IDs and specify their gateway NEs.

When all nodes in the DCN network are running the OSI protocol stack, it is recommended thatyou do not create all NEs as the gateway NEs. Select a portion of nodes as the gateway NEs,and create other NEs as the non-gateway NEs and specify their gateway NEs. Each gateway NEshould manage less than 64 non-gateway NEs to avoid overloading the gateway NEs andreducing the overall T2000 system performance.

When selecting the gateway NEs, select the NEs close to the T2000 on the topology. Thus, lessoverhead bytes are needed when the gateway NEs communicate with the T2000 and theefficiency can be enhanced.

If route layering is supported when you divide the areas, select one NE or multiple NEs in eacharea as the gateway NE or gateway NEs. When creating the non-gateway NEs, specify theirgateway NE in the local area.

Select a standby gateway NE for the non-gateway NEs to ensure the access reliability of theT2000.

5 Planning the DCNOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 67: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Configuring Roles of the LAPD of Optical Interfaces

When using the OSI protocol in the communication between optical interfaces, use the LAPDprotocol at the link layer realized by the optical interfaces. According to the requirements forthe LAPD protocol, set different roles for the LAPD at both the ends of the interconnected opticalinterfaces.

There are two roles of the LAPD, "User" and "Network". The principle for setting the roles isthat the optical interfaces at the two ends interconnected through fibers should be set to differentroles. The optical interface at one end should be set to "User", and that at the other end shouldbe set to "Network".

5.6.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the address and node type, and how to select gateway NEsin the DCN network areas.

Figure 5-1 shows that when the network is constructed by Huawei equipment and equipmentfrom other vendors, the OSI over DCC is used to construct the DCN network.

Figure 5-1 Planning of the DCN network in the OSI over DCC mode

Level 2 Routing Area

Level 1 Routing Area

GG

G

G

AREA ID: 391F1190

G

G

T2000

OSI LAN

OSIDCN

AREA ID: 391F1200

AREA ID: 391F1210

ES

L1-IS

L2-IS

G GateWay

NSAP:391F120008003E0900011D

NE01

NE02

NE03NE13

When planning the DCN network, divide the entire network into three areas. The AREA IDsfor the three areas are "391F1190", "391F1200", and "391F1210" (in hex). The equipment atthe core layer should be configured as the L2-IS, and the equipment at the edge layer should beconfigured as the L1-IS. In addition, select NEs close to the T2000 on the topology as the gatewayNEs.

After the NE AREA ID and NE ID are configured, the NSAP address of an NE is determinedand it is unique. For example, the NSAP address of NE 01 is 391F120008003E0900011D.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 5 Planning the DCN

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

Page 68: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

NOTE

As shown in Figure 5-1, the gateway NEs are the L2 equipment. However, this does not indicate that onlythe L2 equipment can be gateway NEs. The L1 equipment can also be gateway NEs.

When the OSI protocol is used, the L2-IS nodes in the network should be consecutive. Thus,when dividing areas, properly select the L2-IS nodes. As shown in Figure 5-1, NE 03 and NE13 are configured as L1-ISs. In this case, the T2000 cannot manage NEs in AREA B and AREAC, and the network communication is abnormal, because the L2 equipment is not consecutive.

5 Planning the DCNOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

5-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 69: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6 Planning Services

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of services. For the OptiX OSN 2500, whenplanning the services, consider the access capacity for different services and planning principles.

6.1 Basic Planning PrinciplesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple services. When planning the services, follow the basicprinciples.

6.2 Maximum Service Access CapacityFor the OptiX OSN 2500, the maximum service access capacity, access capacity of slots, andcross-connect capacity of slots are defined.

6.3 Planning SDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple SDH services. When planning the SDH services, followthe basic principles.

6.4 Planning Long-Haul Optical TransmissionThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the long-haul optical transmission. When planning the long-hauloptical transmission, follow the basic principles.

6.5 Planning PDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple PDH services. When planning the PDH services, followthe basic principles.

6.6 Planning Ethernet ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple Ethernet services. When planning the Ethernet services,follow the basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actual networksituation.

6.7 Planning RPR ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple RPR services. When planning the RPR services, followthe basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actual network situation.

6.8 Planning ATM and IMA ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple ATM and IMA services. When planning the ATM andIMA services, follow the basic principles.

6.9 Planning SAN and Video Services

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

Page 70: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple SAN and video services. When planning the SAN andvideo services, follow the basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actualnetwork situation.

6.10 Planning DDN ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of DDN services. When planning the DDNservices, follow the basic principles.

6.11 Planning WDM ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of WDM services. When planning the WDMservices for different WDM boards, follow different principles.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 71: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6.1 Basic Planning PrinciplesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple services. When planning the services, follow the basicprinciples.

l Analyze the service requirements.

l Consider the service requirements that can be met in a transmission network.

l Determine the proper schemes for providing services. The following factors should beconsidered:– Valid slots for service boards

– Service routes

– Aligning sequence of services in a VC-4

l Determine the shortest route for the service and align the services, in sequence, in the VC-4.

l Determine the interface types for services.

l Check for the available network resources when planning new services for the existingnetwork. The available resources involve the higher order cross-connection resources,lower order cross-connection resources and VC-4 paths.

l Consider the capability of the network and the equipment in the network of supportingfuture services.

6.2 Maximum Service Access CapacityFor the OptiX OSN 2500, the maximum service access capacity, access capacity of slots, andcross-connect capacity of slots are defined.

6.2.1 Service Access CapacityThe capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 2500 can access varies with the type and quantityof the configured boards.

6.2.2 Slot Access CapacityWith different cross-connect boards, the OptiX OSN 2500 provides different slot accesscapacity.

6.2.3 Cross-Connect CapacityThe Q2CXL1, Q2CXL4 and Q2CXL16 have the same cross-connect capacity.

6.2.1 Service Access CapacityThe capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 2500 can access varies with the type and quantityof the configured boards.

Table 6-1 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 for accessing different services.The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services that is supported, when onlyone specific type of service is accessed.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3

Page 72: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Table 6-1 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500

Service Type Maximum Number of ServicesSupported by a Single Subrack

STM-16 standard or concatenated services 6

STM-16 (FEC) services 4

STM-4 standard or concatenated services 24

STM-1 standard services 74

STM-1 (electrical) services 38

E4 services 16

E3/T3 services 57

E1/T1 services 252

FE services 88

GE services 28

STM-4 ATM services 7

STM-1 ATM services 28

ESCON services 20

FICON/FC100 services 9

FC200 services 4

DVB-ASI services 20

N x 64 kbit/s services (N: 1–31) 32

Framed E1 services 32

6.2.2 Slot Access CapacityWith different cross-connect boards, the OptiX OSN 2500 provides different slot accesscapacity.

Slots 5, 6 and 7 in the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack can be divided into half-height slots as required.Figure 6-1 shows the access capacity of each slot when the three slots are not divided. Figure6-2 shows the access capacity of each slot when the three slots are divided.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 73: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-1 Access capacity of each slot before division of the three slots

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SAP

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIUSLOT22

PIUSLOT23

FANSLOT25

FANSLOT24

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

622M

bit/s

622M

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

Figure 6-2 Access capacity of each slot after division of the three slots

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SAP

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIUSLOT22

PIUSLOT23

FANSLOT25

FANSLOT24

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s

2.5G

bit/s

S19

S20

S21

622M

bit/s

622M

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s

S5

S6

S7

622M

bit/s

622M

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

6.2.3 Cross-Connect CapacityThe Q2CXL1, Q2CXL4 and Q2CXL16 have the same cross-connect capacity.

Table 6-2 lists the cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-5

Page 74: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Table 6-2 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500

Cross-ConnectandSynchronousTiming Board

Higher Order Cross-Connect Capacity

Lower OrderCross-ConnectCapacity

Access Capacity

Q2CXL1 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128VC-4)

20 Gbit/s (128 x 128VC-4)

18.75 Gbit/s (120 x120 VC-4)

Q2CXL4 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128VC-4)

20 Gbit/s (128 x 128VC-4)

18.75 Gbit/s (120 x120 VC-4)

Q2CXL16 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128VC-4)

20 Gbit/s (128 x 128VC-4)

18.75 Gbit/s (120 x120 VC-4)

6.3 Planning SDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple SDH services. When planning the SDH services, followthe basic principles.

6.3.1 Capability of Supporting SDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the SDH standard services, SDH standard concatenation services,and SDH services with FEC.

6.3.2 Planning PrinciplesAdhere to the following principles when planning SDH services.

6.3.1 Capability of Supporting SDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the SDH standard services, SDH standard concatenation services,and SDH services with FEC.

l SDH standard services: STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16.

l SDH standard concatenation services: VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c and VC-4-16c.

l SDH services with FEC: 2.666 Gbit/s.

Table 6-3 lists the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.

Table 6-3 SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type

N1SL16,N2SL16,N3SL16

Interfaces available onthe front panel

L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je

N1SL16A,N2SL16A,N3SL16A

Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2

N1SF16 Interfaces available onthe front panel

Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 75: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type

N1SLQ4 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

N2SLQ4 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

N1SLD4 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

N2SLD4 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

N1SL4 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

N2SL4 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

N1SLT1 Interfaces available onthe front panel

S-1.1

N1SLQ1 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

N2SLQ1 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

N1SL1 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

N2SL1 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

R1SLD4 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

R1SL4 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

R1SLQ1 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

R1SL1 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

N1SEP1a Interfaces available onthe front panel

75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface

N1SEPb 4 x STM-1 lineprocessing board:N1EU04

75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface

8 x STM-1 lineprocessing board:N1OU08

I-1, S-1.1 electrical interface

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-7

Page 76: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type

8 x STM-1 lineprocessing board:N2OU08

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 electrical interface

8 x STM-1 lineprocessing board:N1EU08

75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface

N2SLO1 Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

Q2CXL16c Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2

Q2CXL4c Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

Q2CXL1c Interfaces available onthe front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are the boards of the same type. When they are used with theinterface board, they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. When they provide interfaceson the front panel, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.b: The N1SEP can be used with the N1TSB8 or the N1TSB4 board to realize the TPSprotection.c: The Q2CXL is a board that integrates the line, SCC, cross-connect, and timing units forthe OptiX OSN 2500. It is housed in slot 9 and slot 10. On the T2000, it is displayed as threeboard types: ECXL, GSCC and SL1/4/16, respectively seated in the logical slots 80–81, 82–83 and 9–10.

6.3.2 Planning PrinciplesAdhere to the following principles when planning SDH services.

l Choose proper SDH processing boards according to the interface rate and interface quantity.

l Choose proper optical modules according to the distance among nodes in the network andthe attenuation. Proper optical modules must be used to avoid that the received opticalpower is lower than the receiver sensitivity or overload optical power. For details ontechnical specifications of the SDH processing boards, refer to Chapter 11 "TechnicalSpecifications" in the OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System ProductDescription.

l The SLT1 board is mainly used to access local services or to extend links. The SLT1 canalso provide line interfaces, but this is not the main function of the SLT1.

l If the N1SEP1 is configured as SEP1 on the T2000, services can be accessed only from thetwo electrical interfaces on the front panel. When the N1SEP1 is configured as SEP, theEU08 or OU08 interface board should be used to access eight channels of electrical oroptical interfaces, or the EU04 interface board should be used to access four channels ofelectrical interfaces.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 77: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Used with the EU08 or EU04, the SEP accesses and processes STM-1 electrical signals.Used with the TSB8 or TSB4, the SLH1 can be configured with the TPS protection.

l When the SEP board is used, an interface board is required. The interface board should behoused in the slot exclusive for the processing board.

6.4 Planning Long-Haul Optical TransmissionThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the long-haul optical transmission. When planning the long-hauloptical transmission, follow the basic principles.

6.4.1 Capability of Supporting Long-Haul Optical TransmissionWhen an optical booster amplifier unit and a dispersion compensation board are used, the OptiXOSN 2500 can realize the long-haul transmission of optical signals.

6.4.2 Planning PrinciplesThe BA2, BPA or external COA can be used as an optical booster amplifier board. Among thesethree types of boards, the BA2 or BPA is recommended.

6.4.1 Capability of Supporting Long-Haul Optical TransmissionWhen an optical booster amplifier unit and a dispersion compensation board are used, the OptiXOSN 2500 can realize the long-haul transmission of optical signals.

Table 6-4 lists the optical booster amplifier units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.

Table 6-4 Optical booster amplifier units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features

Board Board Description Input OpticalPower (dBm)

Output Optical Power(dBm)

BA2 Dual-path opticalbooster amplifier board

–6 to +3 +14.5 or +17.5

BPA Optical booster amplifierand pre-amplifier board

BA: –6 to +3PA: –10 to –38(optical signals atthe rate of 2.5 Gbit/s or lower) or –10 to–27 (optical signalsat the rate of 10Gbit/s)

BA: +14.5 or +17.5PA gain: 22 dB

61COA Case-shaped erbiumfiber optical amplifierunit

–6 to +3 +14.5 or +17.5

N1COA Case-shaped signal-pathoptical pre-amplifier unit

–10 to –38 (opticalsignals at the rate of2.5 Gbit/s or less) or–10 to –28 (opticalsignals at the rate of10 Gbit/s)

Gain: 22 dB

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

Page 78: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Board Description Input OpticalPower (dBm)

Output Optical Power(dBm)

62COA Case-shaped Ramanoptical amplifier unit

–39 to –20 (2.5Gbit/s opticalsignals withoutFEC)

Max. switch gain: 15 dBMax. valid gain: 13 dB

ROP Remote optical pumpingunit

- 30 dB optical pumpingpower

N1FIB Filter and isolating board(passive and used withthe ROP)

- -

TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifierboard

–32 to –4 (OBU1-C01) or –32 to –3(OBU1-C02)

–12 to +16 (OBU1-C01) or–9 to +20 (OBU1-C01)

Table 6-5 lists the dispersion compensation units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.

Table 6-5 Dispersion compensation units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features

Board Board Description Dispersion Compensation(ps/nm)

Insertion Loss(dB)

N1DCU Dispersion compensationunit

1020 (60 km)1360 (80 km)

< 8.3

N2DCU Dispersion compensationunit

680 (40 km)1020 (60 km)1360 (80 km)

< 3

The insertion loss of the N2DCU is 3 to 5 dB less than that of the N1DCU.

6.4.2 Planning PrinciplesThe BA2, BPA or external COA can be used as an optical booster amplifier board. Among thesethree types of boards, the BA2 or BPA is recommended.

Generally, the BA2, BPA or DCU should be used with a long-distance optical transmissionmodule to realize long-distance transmission without electrical regeneration. Adhere to thefollowing principles when planning optical booster amplifier boards:

l Use a BA2 with the optical transmission module, whose interfaces are of the V-16.2Je type.

l Use a BA2 and a BPA with the optical transmission module, whose interfaces are of theU-16.2Je type.

l Use a BA2 and a BPA with the optical transmission module, whose interfaces are of theUe-16.2c, Ue-16.2d or Ue-16.2f type.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 79: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Using the COA, the OptiX OSN 2500 can transmit optical signals for a distance from 80 to 200km.

The ROP unit is used to amplify 2.5 Gbit/s optical signals and to transmit optical signals of 1550-nm wavelength for a long distance (70 dB). If the fiber attenuation is 0.2 dB/km, the opticalsignals can be transmitted for 350 km without regeneration.

The ROP unit can also be used to amplify 2.5Gbit/s optical signals.

If the FIB is jointly used with the ROP to filter wavelengths and isolate the optical signals fromthe ROP to the optical receive equipment.

6.5 Planning PDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple PDH services. When planning the PDH services, followthe basic principles.

6.5.1 Capability of Supporting PDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the E1/T1, E3/T3, and E4 services.

6.5.2 Planning PrinciplesChoose proper PDH processing boards and interface boards according to the actual service types.Configure the TPS protection for the PDH processing boards as required.

6.5.1 Capability of Supporting PDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the E1/T1, E3/T3, and E4 services.

Table 6-6 lists the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.

Table 6-6 PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features

Board Full Name ValidSlots

InterfacingMode

Interface Type

N1SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1processing board

Slots 6–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E4/STM-1electrical interface

N2SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1processing board

Slots 6–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E4/STM-1electrical interface

N1PD3 6 x E3/T3 processingboard

Slots 6–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

N1PL3 3 x E3/T3 processingboard

Slots 6–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

N1PL3A

3 x E3/T3 processingboard

Slots 5–8,11–13

Interfacesavailable on thefront panel

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-11

Page 80: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Full Name ValidSlots

InterfacingMode

Interface Type

N2PQ3 12 x E3/T3processing board

Slots 6–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processingboard

Slots 6–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processingboard

Slots 6–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

N2PL3A

3 x E3/T3 processingboard

Slots 5–8,11–13

Interfacesavailable on thefront panel

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

N1PQ1A

63 x E1 processingboard

Slots 5–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E1 interface

N1PQ1B

63 x E1 processingboard

Slots 5–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

120-ohm E1 interface

N1PQM 63 x T1/E1processing board

Slots 5–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

120-ohm E1 interface,100-ohm T1 interface

N2PQ1A

63 x E1 processingboard

Slots 5–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E1 interface

N2PQ1B

63 x E1 processingboard

Slots 5–7,12–13

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

120-ohm E1 interface,100-ohm T1 interface

R1PD1A

32 x E1 processingboard (half-height)

Slots 5–7,19–21

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E1 interface

R1PD1B

32 x E1 processingboard (half-height)

Slots 5–7,19–21

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

120-ohm E1 interface

R2PD1A

32 x E1 processingboard (half-height)

Slots 5–7,19–21

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

75-ohm E1 interface

R2PD1B

32 x E1 processingboard (half-height)

Slots 5–7,19–21

Interfacesavailable on theinterface board

120-ohm E1 interface,100-ohm T1 interface

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 81: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6.5.2 Planning PrinciplesChoose proper PDH processing boards and interface boards according to the actual service types.Configure the TPS protection for the PDH processing boards as required.

6.6 Planning Ethernet ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple Ethernet services. When planning the Ethernet services,follow the basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actual networksituation.

6.6.1 Capability of Supporting Ethernet ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports four types of Ethernet services, including EPL, EVPL, EPLAN,and EVPLAN.

6.6.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the Ethernet services, follow the basic principles and select the correspondingservice types according to the actual network situation.

6.6.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted EPL ServicesThe transparently transmitted EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

6.6.4 Planning Port-Shared EPL ServicesThe port-shared EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

6.6.5 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EPL ServicesThe VCTRUNK-shared EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

6.6.6 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL ServicesThe VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

6.6.7 Planning EVPL Services (Transmit Scheme)The EVPL services (Transmit Scheme) can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

6.6.8 Planning EPLAN ServicesThe EPLAN services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

6.6.9 Planning EVPLAN ServicesThe EVPLAN services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

6.6.1 Capability of Supporting Ethernet ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports four types of Ethernet services, including EPL, EVPL, EPLAN,and EVPLAN.

The OptiX OSN 2500 provides several types of the Ethernet processing boards to supportdifferent Ethernet services. Table 6-7, Table 6-8, Table 6-9 and Table 6-10 lists the Ethernetprocessing boards.

Table 6-7 Features of the N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 boards

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Interface 4 FE 4 FE 8 FE 8 FE 8 FE

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-13

Page 82: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Interfacetype

10Base-T,100Base-TX

10Base-T,100Base-TX

10Base-T,100Base-TX,100Base-FX

10Base-T,100Base-TX,100Base-FX

10Base-T,100Base-TX,100Base-FX

Interfaceboard

None None N1ETF8,N1EFF8

N1ETS8(cooperatingwith TSB8 torealize 1:1TPS),N1ETF8,N1EFF8

N1ETS8(cooperatingwith TSB8 torealize 1:1TPS),N1ETF8,N1EFF8

Serviceframeformat

Ethernet II,IEEE 802.3,IEEE 802.1q/p

Ethernet II,IEEE 802.3,IEEE 802.1 q/p

Ethernet II,IEEE 802.3,IEEE 802.1 q/p

Ethernet II,IEEE 802.3,IEEE 802.1q/p

Ethernet II,IEEE 802.3,IEEE 802.1q/p

JUMBOframe

Supported,9600 bytes

Supported,9600 bytes

Supported,9600 bytes

Supported,9600 bytes

Supported,9600 bytes

Uplinkbandwidth

4 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4

Mappingmode

VC-12,VC-3,VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)

VC-12,VC-3,VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)

VC-12,VC-3,VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)

VC-12,VC-3,VC-12-xv (x≤63),VC-3-xv (x≤12)

VC-12,VC-3,VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)

Number ofVCTRUNKs

12 24 12 24 24

Ethernetprivate line(EPL)

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Ethernetvirtualprivate line(EVPL)

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

EthernetprivateLAN(EPLAN)

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 83: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

EthernetvirtualprivateLAN(EVPLAN)

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

StaticMPLSlabel

MartinioElabelsupported

MartinioElabelsupported

MartinioElabelsupported

MartinioElabelsupported

MartinioElabelsupported

StackVLAN

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

VLAN IEEE 802.1q/p

IEEE 802.1q/p

IEEE 802.1q/p

IEEE802.1q/p

IEEE 802.1q/p

RSTP Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Multicastlistening(IGMPSnooping)

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Encapsulation

Genericframingprocedure(GFP)

GFP GFP GFP GFP

Link statepassthrough(LPT)

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Linkcapacityadjustmentscheme(LCAS)

ITU-T G.7042

ITU-T G.7042

ITU-T G.7042

ITU-T G.7042

ITU-T G.7042

Committedaccess rate(CAR)

Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s)

Flowcontrol

IEEE 802.3X IEEE 802.3X IEEE 802.3X IEEE802.3X

IEEE 802.3X

Intra-boardportaggregation

Notsupported

Supported Notsupported

Supported Supported

Test frame Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-15

Page 84: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Ethernetperformancemonitoring

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Table 6-8 Features of the N1EGS2 and N2EGS2 boards

Function N1EGS2 N2EGS2

Interface 2 GE 2 GE

Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX

1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,1000Base-ZX

Interface board None None

Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE802.1 q/p

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p

JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes Supported, 9600 bytes

Uplink bandwidth 8 VC-4 16 VC-4

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)

VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63),VC-3-xv (x≤12)

Number ofVCTRUNKs

24 48

EPL Supported Supported

EVPL Supported Supported

EPLAN Supported Supported

EVPLAN Not supported Supported

Static MPLS label Not supported MartinioE label supported

Stack VLAN Not supported Supported

VLAN IEEE 802.1q/p IEEE 802.1q/p

RSTP Not supported Supported

Multicast listening(IGMP Snooping)

Not supported Supported

Encapsulation GFP GFP

LPT Supported Supported

LCAS Not supported ITU-T G.7042

CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s)

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 85: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Function N1EGS2 N2EGS2

Flow control IEEE 802.3X IEEE 802.3X

Intra-board portaggregation

Supported Supported

Test frame Supported Supported

Ethernetperformancemonitoring

Supported Supported

Table 6-9 Features of the N1EGT2, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A and R1EFT4 boards

Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A R1EFT4

Interface 2 GE 16 FE 8 FE 4 FE

Interface type 1000Base-SX,1000Base-LX,1000Base-ZX

10Base-T,100Base-TX,100Base-FX

10Base-T,100Base-TX

10Base-T,100Base-TX

Interface board None Supports 8 x FEif not used withan interfaceboard.Supports 16 x FEif used withinterface boardsN1ETF8 andN1EFF8.

None None

Service frameformat

Ethernet II,IEEE 802.3,IEEE802.1QTAG

Ethernet II,IEEE 802.3,IEEE802.1QTAG

Ethernet II, IEEE802.3, IEEE802.1QTAG

Ethernet II,IEEE 802.3,IEEE802.1QTAG

JUMBO frame Supported,9600 bytes

Supported, 9600bytes

Supported by thelatter four ports,9600 bytes

Supported, 9600bytes

Uplinkbandwidth

16 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 4 VC-4

Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4,VC-3-xv (x≤24),VC-4-xv (x≤8)

VC-12, VC-3,VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤3)

VC-12, VC-3,VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤3)

VC-12, VC-3,VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤3)

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-17

Page 86: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A R1EFT4

Number ofVCTRUNKs

2 16 8 4

Ethernet servicetypes

Only EPLsupported;EVPL,EPLAN andEVPLANnotsupported

Only EPLsupported;EVPL, EPLANand EVPLANnot supported

Only EPLsupported; EVPL,EPLAN andEVPLAN notsupported

Only EPLsupported;EVPL, EPLANand EVPLANnot supported

MPLS Notsupported

Not supported Not supported Not supported

VLAN Transparenttransmission

Transparenttransmission

Transparenttransmission

Transparenttransmission

Encapsulation GFP, LAPS,HDLC

GFP, LAPS,HDLC

GFP, LAPS,HDLC

GFP, LAPS,HDLC

LPT Notsupported

Not supported Not supported Not supported

LCAS ITU-T G.7042

ITU-T G.7042 ITU-T G.7042 ITU-T G.7042

CAR Not supported

Flow control IEEE802.3X

IEEE 802.3X IEEE 802.3X IEEE 802.3X

Test frame Supported Supported Supported Supported

Ethernetperformancemonitoring

Supported Supported Supported Supported

Table 6-10 Features of the EMS4 and EGS4 boards

Function N1EMS4 N1EGS4, N3EGS4

Interface 4 GE and 16 FE 4 GE

Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,100Base-FX

1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX

Interface board Supports 4 x GE if not used with aninterface board.Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if used withinterface boards N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.

None

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 87: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Function N1EMS4 N1EGS4, N3EGS4

Protection Supports 1+1 intra-board protection and port level protection.

Service frameformat

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p

JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes

Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-4-xv(x≤8)

Number ofVCTRUNKs

64

EPL Supported

EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.

EPLAN Supported

EVPLAN Supported

Static MPLS label Not supported

VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ.Supports the adding, deletion and exchangeof VLAN labels, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.

RSTP Supported

Multicast listening(IGMP Snooping)

Supported

Encapsulation GFP, LAPS, HDLC

LPT Supported

LCAS ITU-T G.7042

CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s)

QoS trafficclassification

Supports port flow and port+VLAN flow.

CoS Supported

Shaping Supported

Flow control Supports IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control, based on GE/FE port.

Ethernetperformancemonitoring

Supported

Ethernet OAM Supported

Test frame Supported

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-19

Page 88: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Function N1EMS4 N1EGS4, N3EGS4

Service mirroring Not supported

Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.

6.6.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the Ethernet services, follow the basic principles and select the correspondingservice types according to the actual network situation.

Basic Planning Principles

Adhere to the following principles when planning Ethernet services:

l Use the N1EGT2, N1EFT8 or N1EFT8A for Ethernet services that require only transparenttransmission. Use the N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N1EMS4,N1EGS4, N3EGS4 or N2EGS2 for services that require the Layer 2 switching and sharedbandwidth.

l The Ethernet data frames should be encapsulated before being accessed into an SDHnetwork. The connected Ethernet boards should encapsulate data frames in the same format.For example, the Ethernet boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 that encapsulate data frames inthe GFP, LAPS or HDLC format cannot be connected to the ET1 board of the OptiX 2500+(Metro3000) that encapsulate data frames in the ML-PPP format.

l The Ethernet boards have GE and FE optical interfaces. Optical interfaces of the same typeshould be used to connect Ethernet processing boards.

l Choose a proper optical module for the Ethernet board with GE optical interfaces accordingto the transmission distance.

l If an Ethernet processing board is used with an interface board, more optical interfaces areavailable.

l Set LCAS, CAR and flow control for the Ethernet services as required.

l Apply different protection schemes according to the boards used:

– Configure TPS protection for the N2EFS0 and N4EFS0.

– Configure BPS protection for the N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4.

– Configure PPS protection also for the N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4.

Selection of Service Types

Ethernet services are of four types, which are EPL, EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN.

Ⅰ. EPL service

l The EPL service can be used in three schemes:

– Scheme Ι: transparent transmission EPL

– Scheme Ⅱ: port-shared EPL

– Scheme Ш: VCTRUNK-shared EPL

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 89: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l If scheme Ι is applied, the EPL service uses the line bandwidth exclusively and is isolatedfrom other services. Hence, the EPL service is of higher security. This scheme for EPLservices can be used for private lines of key customers.

l If scheme Ⅱ or scheme Ш is applied, the point-to-multipoint transmission of Ethernetservices is realized. By identifying VLAN tags, several EPL services can share the sameport or VCTRUNK. As a result, the port resources are saved. The services of different usersshare the bandwidth and content for bandwidth in a fair manner. Such a scheme is applicableif users require large-volume services at different time.

Ⅱ. EVPL service

l The VLAN IDs and MPLS tags can be used to isolate the EVPL services of different usersor the EVPL services of different departments in the same company. In this way, the dataof the same VLAN in the same link is isolated.

l Ingress and Egress indicate two operations performed to the label switch path (LSP). Ingressindicates that the MPLS label is added and Egress indicates that the MPLS label is stripped.When the EVPL services enter a network, the Ingress operation is performed. When theEVPL services exit a network, the Egress operation is performed. This is a typicalapplication of the EVPL service.

l The EVPL service can be applied in the Transit scheme to transparently transmit andforward the MPLS data packets.

l The transmission efficiency of the EVPL service is low and complex configuration isrequired. As a result, use the EPL service instead of the EVPL service unless the EPLservice is required.

Ш. EPLAN service

l The EPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth at multiple points. As a result,the EPLAN service is in line with the dynamic feature of data services and the bandwidthresources are saved.

l The configured EPLAN service should not form a ring. Otherwise, a broadcast storm iscaused. If the EPLAN service is configured into a ring, the RSTP protocol should be enabledin the network to avoid broadcast storms.

Ⅳ. EVPLAN service

l The VLAN IDs and MPLS labels can be used to isolate the EVPLAN services of differentusers or the EVPLAN services of different departments in the same company.

l The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth at multiple points. Differentfrom the EPLAN service, the EVPLAN service requires that any two nodes in the networkbe connected by an LSP to form a mesh network. In addition, the service features helpprevent broadcast storms effectively.

l The MPLS technology is applied for the EVPLAN service. As a result, the transmissionefficiency is lower than that of the EPLAN service and the configuration is more complex.Use the EPLAN service to meet the service requirements unless the EVPLAN service isspecifically required.

6.6.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted EPL ServicesThe transparently transmitted EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service RequirementCompany A and company B at NE 1 need to transmit data services respectively to company Aand company B at NE 2. It is required that services of company A and company B are totally

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-21

Page 90: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

isolated from each other. Both company A and company B provide 100M Ethernet electricalinterfaces. Company A requires 10M bandwidth and company B requires 45M bandwidth.

Networking Application

Services of company A and company B are required to be transparently transmitted between NE1 and NE 2. Two OptiX OSN 2500 systems can be used as NE 1 and NE 2. Figure 6-3 showsthe networking diagram.

Figure 6-3 Networking diagram for transparently transmitted EPL services

VCTRUNK 1PORT1

PORT2

VCTRUNK 1

VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2

POTR1

A

NE 1 NE 2

B B

A

PORT2

OptiX OSNequipment

Enterpriseuser

At NE 1, services from company A and company B are accessed respectively from Ethernetports. At NE 2, services from company A and company B are also respectively accessed fromEthernet ports.

In the line, the EPL service from company A is carried by one VCTRUNK and the EPL servicefrom company B is carried by another VCTRUNK.

Application Scheme

Use the port routing scheme for the transparently transmitted EPL services.

Hardware Configuration

Configure one EFS4 for NE 1 and NE 2 to access Ethernet services from company A andcompany B respectively.

Service Route

Table 6-11 lists the service routes.

Table 6-11 Service routes for the transparently transmitted EPL services

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2

Company A(NE 1←→NE2)

Port 1←→VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK 1←→Port 1

Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 1.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 91: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2

Company B(NE 1←→NE2)

Port 2←→VCTRUNK 2 VCTRUNK 2←→Port 2

One VC-3 is bound in VCTRUNK 2.

6.6.4 Planning Port-Shared EPL ServicesThe port-shared EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service RequirementThe headquarters of company A is located at NE 1 and two departments are located at NE 2.The headquarters need to communicate with the two branches. The two departments should beisolated from each other and should each use 10M bandwidth. The Ethernet switch of companyA provides 100M Ethernet electrical interfaces and the Ethernet switch at the headquarterssupports the VLAN.

Networking ApplicationServices from the two departments are transmitted to the headquarters at NE 1 and are thenconverged. Services from the headquarters are also transmitted to the two departments at NE 2.The OptiX OSN 2500 equipment can be used to meet the service requirement. Figure 6-4 showsthe networking diagram.

Figure 6-4 Networking diagram for port-shared EPL services

VCTRUNK 1PORT1

VCTRUNK 2Headquartersof company A

NE 1 NE 2

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK 1

Department 1

Department 2

OptiX OSNequipment Enterpris

e user

POTR1

PORT2

Application SchemeUse the port+VLAN as the routing scheme for the port-shared EPL services. Figure 6-5 showsthe details.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-23

Page 92: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-5 Application scheme for port-shared EPL services

Headquarters ofcompany A

NE 1 NE 2

Department 1

Department 2

OptiX OSNequipment

Enterpriseuser

PORT1

PORT2

VLAN100

PORT1

VLAN100VLAN200 VLAN200

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

In the converging direction, at NE 2, services of the two departments are accessed from Ethernetports of NE 2 and then are added with VLAN tags (VLAN ID: 100 and 200). The services aretransmitted by one VCTRUNK respectively to NE 1. The services are converged at NE 1 andare then output from one Ethernet port.

In the distributing direction, the Ethernet processing board of NE 1 processes the services (VLANID: 100 and 200) from the headquarters of company A. The Ethernet processing board of NE 1then uses different VCTRUNKs to distribute the respective services to the two departments atNE 2.

Hardware ConfigurationConfigure one EFS4 for NE 1 and NE 2 to access Ethernet services from the headquarters anddepartments of company A respectively.

Service RouteTable 6-12 lists the service routes.

Table 6-12 Service routes for the port-shared EPL services

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2

Headquarter←→Division1 (NE 1←→NE 2)

Port 1+VLAN ID: 100←→VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 100

VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 100←→Port 1+VLAN ID: 100

Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 1.

Headquarter←→Division2 (NE 1←→NE 2)

Port 1+VLAN ID: 200←→VCTRUNK 2+VLAN ID: 200

VCTRUNK 2+VLAN ID: 200←→Port 2+VLAN ID: 200

Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 2.

6.6.5 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EPL ServicesThe VCTRUNK-shared EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 93: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Service RequirementUser A and user A’ are community users, who are at different places. User A needs tocommunicate with user A’. User B and user B’ are cyber cafe users, who are also at differentplaces. User B needs to communicate with user B’. The services of community users are totallyisolated from the services of cyber cafe users. Community users use the network mostly at night,whereas cyber cafe users use the network mostly during day. Hence, community users can sharea 10M bandwidth with cyber cafe users. The Ethernet equipment of the users provides 100MEthernet electrical interface, but does not support the VLAN.

Networking ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 2500 systems can be used for the community users and cyber cafe users to sharea 10M bandwidth. Figure 6-6 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-6 Networking diagram for the VCTRUNK-shared EPL services

VCTRUNK 1

PORT1

PORT2

A A'

NE 1 NE 2

B B'

Communityuser

Cyber cafeuser

OptiX OSNequipment

PORT2

PORT1

Application SchemeUse the port+VLAN routing scheme for the VCTRUNK-shared EPL services. Figure 6-7 showsthe details.

Figure 6-7 Networking diagram for VCTRUNK-shared EPL services

VCTRUNK

A A'

NE 1 NE 2

B

Communityuser

Cyber cafeuser

OptiX OSNequipment

VLAN100

VLAN200

VLAN100

VLAN200

1 PORT2 1PORT PORTPORT2

B'

At NE 1, services of user A and user B are accessed from Port 1 and Port 2 respectively. VLANtags (VLAN ID: 100 and 200) are then added to the services, which are then converged by an

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-25

Page 94: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Ethernet processing board. The converged services are transmitted through one VCTRUNK toNE 2.

At NE 2, the Ethernet processing board processes the converged services (VLAN ID: 100 and200) from NE 1 and distributes the services to user A’ and user B’ respectively, according tothe VLAN tags.

Hardware ConfigurationConfigure one EFS4 board for NE 1 to access Ethernet services from user A and user B.

Configure one EFS4 board for NE 2 to access Ethernet services from user A’ and user B’.

Service RouteTable 6-13 lists the service routes.

Table 6-13 Routes for the VCTRUNK-shared EPL services

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2

A←→A’ (NE 1←→NE 2)

Port 1+VLAN ID: 100←→VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 100

VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 100←→Port 1+VLAN ID: 100

B←→B’ (NE 1←→NE 2)

Port 2+VLAN ID: 200←→VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 200

VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 200←→Port 2+VLAN ID: 200

Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 1.

6.6.6 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL ServicesThe VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service RequirementTwo branches of company A are located at NE 1 and NE 2 respectively. The department ofbranch 1 needs to communicate with the same department of branch 2. The service of onedepartment is isolated from the service of another department. The two departments should sharea 10M bandwidth. The VLAN ID for the services of the two departments of company A is 100.The two departments of company A can provide 100M Ethernet electrical interfaces.

Networking ApplicationThe services of the two departments are of the same VLAN ID and share a bandwidth. Hence,such services can be configured as EVPL services. The EVPL service is encapsulated in theMPLS-L2 VPN format and supports the identification of external labels (Tunnel) and internallabels (VC).

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the EVPL service and can be used to meet the previoustransmission requirements. Figure 6-8 shows the networking diagram.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 95: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-8 Networking diagram for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services

VCTRUNK 1

PORT1

PORT2 PORT2

PORT1

NE 1 NE 2

Company A OptiX OSNequipment

Department B

Branch A

Department B

Department A

Branch B

Department A

Application Scheme

The port+MPLS routing scheme is used for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. Figure6-9 shows the details.

Figure 6-9 Application scheme for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services

Branch 1

NE 1 NE 2

Company A OptiX OSNequipment

Branch 2

DepartmentB

DepartmentA

DepartmentB

DepartmentA

PPE

Add label

P PE

Strip label

VCTRUNK1

PORT2

PORT1PORT1

PORT2

The services of the two departments are of the same VLAN ID and share a bandwidth. Hence,it is necessary to add MPLS labels for identification.

At NE 1, the services of departments A and B are accessed from Port 1 and Port 2, and are addedwith MPLS labels (Tunnel label and VC label). The Ethernet processing board converges andthen transmits the services in one VCTRUNK to NE 2.

At NE 2, the Ethernet processing board processes the services with different MPLS labels fromNE 1 and distributes the services to the two departments of branch 2 respectively, according tothe MPLS labels.

Hardware Configuration

Configure one EFS4 board for NE 1 to access Ethernet services of department A and departmentB.

Configure one EFS4 board for NE 2 to access Ethernet services of department A and departmentB.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-27

Page 96: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Service RouteTable 6-14 lists the service routes.

Table 6-14 Routes for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2

Sub-departmentA

Port 1←→VCTRUNK 1+MPLSlabel 1

VCTRUNK 1+MPLS label 1←→Port1

Sub-departmentB

Port 2←→VCTRUNK 1+MPLSlabel 2

VCTRUNK 1+MPLS label 2←→Port2

Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 1.

6.6.7 Planning EVPL Services (Transmit Scheme)The EVPL services (Transmit Scheme) can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service RequirementTwo branches of company A are located at different places and need to transmit data servicesto each other. The router that supports the MPLS is connected to the MSTP equipment. Thetransmitted data packets have the MPLS labels. The MSTP equipment transmits only the MPLSdata packets and the bandwidth is 10M. Company A provides 100M Ethernet electricalinterfaces.

Networking ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to transparently transmit the MPLS data packets of the twobranches. Figure 6-10 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-10 Networking diagram for EVPL services (Transmit scheme)

VCTRUNK 1(P)

VCTRUNK1(P)

NE 1 NE 2

OptiX OSNequipment Enterprise

user

TransitLSP Transit

LSP

VCTRUNK PORT1(P)PORT1(P)

Branch 1 ofcompany A

Branch 2 ofcompany A

The Transmit scheme for EVPL services can be applied to transparently transmit the MPLS datapackets.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 97: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Application SchemeThe port+transmit LSP scheme is applied for the EVPL services.

All logical ports (Port and VCTRUNK included) of NE 1 and NE 2 are set as P ports. The LSPis of the Transit type. The label exchange is performed to the MPLS data packets, which arethen transparently transmitted.

Hardware ConfigurationConfigure one EFS4 for NE 1 and NE 2 respectively to access the MPLS data packets fromcompany A.

Service Route

Table 6-15 Service routes for the EVPL services (Transit scheme)

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2

Company A Port 1+MPLS label 1←→VCTRUNK 1+MPLS label 2

VCTRUNK 1+MPLS label 2←→Port1+MPLS label 1

Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 1.The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the exchange ofonly the Tunnel labels.

6.6.8 Planning EPLAN ServicesThe EPLAN services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service RequirementThree branches of company A are located at NE 1, NE 2 and NE 3. As required, the three branchescan communicate with each other. The three branches dynamically share a 10M bandwidth. TheEthernet equipment of the company A provides 100M Ethernet electrical interface and theVLAN ID is 100.

Networking ApplicationThe three branches can communicate with each other and dynamically share a bandwidth. TheEPLAN service meets the requirements. Using a virtual bridge (VB), the Ethernet processingboard of the OptiX OSN 2500 can perform Layer 2 switching on the Ethernet data. Hence, theOptiX OSN 2500 supports the EPLAN service. Figure 6-11 shows the networking diagram forthe EPLAN service.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-29

Page 98: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-11 Networking diagram for the EPLAN service

Department 1of company A

NE 1 NE 2

Company A OptiX OSNequipment

NE3

Accesspoint

Port 1

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VBVB

VCTRUNK1

VB

PORT1

VCTRUNK1

PORT1PORT1

Port 1

Port 1

Department 2of company A

Department 3of company A

Application SchemeThe VB is used for the application of the EPLAN service.

Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a port address table.The system updates the table by self-learning. Services of branch 2 are accessed to NE 2. Thedata packets select the mapping VCTRUNK according to the port address table. The data packetsare then transmitted to branch 1 and branch 3.

Hardware ConfigurationConfigure one EFS0 and one EFF8 for NE 1 to access Ethernet services from branch 1 ofcompany A.

Configure one EFS0 and one EFF8 for NE 2 to access Ethernet services from branch 2 ofcompany A.

Configure one EFS0 and one EFF8 for NE 3 to access Ethernet services from branch 3 ofcompany A.

Service RouteTable 6-16 lists the routes for the EPLAN service.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 99: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Table 6-16 Routes for the EPLAN service

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2 NE 3

Company A VB (Port 1, VCTRUNK1)Filter table (Port 1,VCTRUNK 1) forVLAN ID 100

VB (Port 1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK 2)Filtertable (Port 1,VCTRUNK 1,VCTRUNK 2) forVLAN ID 100

VB (Port 1, VCTRUNK1)Filter table (Port 1,VCTRUNK 1) forVLAN ID 100

Both VCTRUNK 1 and VCTRUNK 2 are bound with five VC-12s.

6.6.9 Planning EVPLAN ServicesThe EVPLAN services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service RequirementThree branches of company A are located at NE 1, NE 2 and NE 3. As required, the three branchescan communicate with each other. Three branches of company B are located at NE 1, NE 2 andNE 3. As required, the three branches also can communicate with each other. The services ofcompany A and B are isolated from each other and share the line bandwidth. The data packetsof company A and company B are of the same VLAN ID. Both company A and company Bprovide 100M Ethernet electrical interfaces. The Ethernet equipment of users supports theVLAN.

Networking ApplicationThe EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and support the isolation of MPLSlabels for the data packets accessed into the same VLAN. The data services with the same VLANID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth. The EVPLAN servicecan meet the service requirements. Figure 6-12 shows the networking diagram for the EVPLANservice.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-31

Page 100: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-12 Networking diagram for the EVPLAN service

NE 1 NE 2

CompanyAccess point

LSP

VCTRUNK1

PORT1PORT2

VCTRUNK2

PE P

PE P

VCTR

UN

K1

POR

T1PO

RT2

VCTR

UN

K2PE P PE P

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

PE P

PE P

LSP LSP PORT1PORT2

PORT 1

Department 2 ofcompany B

VB

VB

VB

OptiX NE

NE 3

Department 2 ofcompany A

PORT 2

Department 3 ofcompany B

Department 3 ofcompany A PORT 1

PORT 2

PORT 2

PORT 1

Department 1 ofcompany A

Department 1 ofcompany B

Different from the EPLAN service, the EVPLAN service is further encapsulated in the MPLSformat. The data packets of the same VLAN ID are identified according to the MPLS labels.Hence, data packets of the same VLAN but of different VBs can be carried by the sameVCTRUNK. In this way, several branches of company A and company B dynamically share thebandwidth and have isolated services.

Application Scheme

The VB+MPLS routing scheme is used for the EVPLAN service.

The Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 support the creation of VBs and theMPLS encapsulation. The EVPLAN service supports the MPLS encapsulation. Hence, severalVB users share the same VCTRUNK. In this way, several VB users dynamically share thebandwidth.

At NE 1, branch 1 of company A is of VB1 and branch 1 of company B is of VB2. In onedirection, VB1 and VB2 share VCTRUNK 1, which is bound with five VC-12s. In the otherdirection, VB1 and VB2 share VCTRUNK 2, which is also bound with five VC-12s. In this way,VB1 (company A) and VB2 (company B) dynamically share a 10M bandwidth. The applicationschemes for NE 2 and NE 3 are the same as that for NE 1.

The EVPLAN service requires that any two nodes be connected by an LSP.

Hardware Configuration

Configure one EFS0 and one ETF8 interface boards for NE 1. Use two Ethernet ports to accessEthernet services from branch 1 of company A and branch 1 of company B respectively.

Configure one EFS0 and one ETF8 interface boards for NE 2. Use two Ethernet ports to accessEthernet services from branch 2 of company A and branch 2 of company B respectively.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 101: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Configure one EFS0 and one ETF8 interface boards for NE 3. Use two Ethernet ports to accessEthernet services from branch 3 of company A and branch 3 of company B respectively.

Service RouteTable 6-17 lists the service routes.

Table 6-17 Routes for the EVPLAN service

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2 NE 3

Company A VB1: Port 1, VCTRUNK 1 (MPLS label 1), VCTRUNK 2 (MPLS label 1)Filter table (Port 1, VCTRUNK 1, VCTRUNK 2) for the VLAN ID 100

Company B VB2: Port 2, VCTRUNK 1 (MPLS label 2), VCTRUNK 2 (MPLS label 2)Filter table (Port 2, VCTRUNK 1, VCTRUNK 2) for the VLAN ID 100

Both VCTRUNK 1 and VCTRUNK 2 are bound with five VC-12s.

6.7 Planning RPR ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple RPR services. When planning the RPR services, followthe basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actual network situation.

6.7.1 Capability of the OptiX OSN 2500 of Supporting RPR ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports two types of RPR services, the EVPL and EVPLAN.

6.7.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the RPR services, follow the basic principles and select the corresponding servicetypes according to the actual network situation.

6.7.3 Planning EVPL Services for RPR BoardsThe EVPL services for RPR boards can be used to plan the RPR services.

6.7.4 Planning EVPLAN Services for RPR BoardsThe EVPLAN services for RPR boards ban be used to plan the RPR services.

6.7.1 Capability of the OptiX OSN 2500 of Supporting RPR ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports two types of RPR services, the EVPL and EVPLAN.

Table 6-18 lists the Ethernet RPR boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.

Table 6-18 Ethernet RPR boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features

Function N1EMR0 N2EMR0 N2EGR2

Interface 1 GE and 12 FE 2 GE

Service frameformat

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG

JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-33

Page 102: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Function N1EMR0 N2EMR0 N2EGR2

Maximum uplinkbandwidth

16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Mappinggranularity

VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-xv (x≤8)

EVPL Supported

EVPLAN Supported

Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported

Stack VLAN Supported

VLAN Supports 4096 VLAN tags, as well as the addition, deletion, andexchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q/p.

Spanning tree Supports RSTP.

Multicast listening(IGMP Snooping)

Supported

RPR protection Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering protectionschemes, with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms.

Encapsulation GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.LAPS, compliant with ITU-TX.86.

LCAS Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042

CAR CAR based onport, port+VLAN,with thegranularity of 64kbit/s

CAR based on port, port+VLAN, or port+VLAN+Priority, with the granularity of 64 kbit/s

Flow control Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X

QoS flowclassification

The N1EMR0 supports flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, and PORT+VLAN PRI.The N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 support flow classification based onPORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT+VLAN PRI, and MPLS label.

Intra-board portaggregation

Not supported Supported Supported

Weighted fairnessalgorithm

Supported

Topology auto-discovery

Supported

Maximum numberof nodes

255

Service class Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 103: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6.7.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the RPR services, follow the basic principles and select the corresponding servicetypes according to the actual network situation.

Basic Planning PrinciplesThe RPR boards support only the EVPL and EVPLAN services.

The Ethernet data frames should be encapsulated before being accessed into an SDH network.The connected Ethernet boards should encapsulate data frames in the same format.

The RPR boards have GE and FE optical interfaces. Optical interfaces of the same type shouldbe used to connect Ethernet processing boards.

Choose a proper optical module for the Ethernet board that has GE interfaces according to thetransmission distance.

If one Ethernet processing board is used with an interface board, more interfaces are available.

Set the LCAS, CAR and flow control for the Ethernet services as required.

Set the quality of service (QoS) class for different services.

When an RPR involves more than one ring, connection at the electrical layer is required.

Selection of Service TypesThe RPR boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 support the EVPL and EVPLAN services. With theguaranteed QoS, services also share the bandwidth, fairly content and have the switchingprotection.

Private lines have the following features in terms of the structure:

l The services are accessed at many points.

l The services are widely distributed.

l Lower service bandwidth is required.

Due to these features, the RPR single-ring structure is not suitable for private lines. In addition,EPL services require that the bandwidth should be guaranteed for the service of a higher priority.As a result, the advantages of the RPR such as fairness contention and statistical multiplexingare not fully displayed. Hence, it is recommended that you use Ethernet boards that do not havethe RPR features, for the EPL services.

In a transmission network, the common services are convergence services that require largecapacity but lower QoS. If the Ethernet processing boards that have Layer 2 switching are usedto transmit services, the following problems may occur.

l When the ring-shared scheme without Layer 2 switching is applied, all services can sharethe bandwidth. If one node has large traffic volume, the bandwidth for the other nodescannot be guaranteed.

l If the bandwidth for each node is limited, the efficiency of sharing the bandwidth is notrealized.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-35

Page 104: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Ethernet services are always protected at the SDH layer and require bandwidth for extraservices.

The RPR is a ring technology used to dynamically share the bandwidth. Hence, the RPR is aproper solution for transmitting services of large granularities and low priority. The fairnessalgorithm is used to achieve traffic equilibrium and the bandwidth is effectively used. In addition,the Ethernet ring protection is provided to the services and the protection switching time is lessthan 50 ms.

6.7.3 Planning EVPL Services for RPR BoardsThe EVPL services for RPR boards can be used to plan the RPR services.

Service RequirementCompany A and company B are located at NE 2, and company C is located at NE 3. The Ethernetservices from companies A, B and C are to be converged at the central node, NE 1, and are thento be transmitted to the backbone Ethernet equipment through GE interfaces. The Ethernetservices of the three companies must be isolated from each other. The Ethernet equipment atNE 1 supports the MPLS.

The Ethernet services from companies A and B are output from FE electrical interfaces and theEthernet services from company C are output from GE optical interfaces. All EPL services sharethe bandwidth.

Networking ApplicationThe RPR can be used to meet the service requirements. The RPR is jointly used with the MPLStechnology to provide EVPL services that can share the bandwidth.

In Figure 6-13, NE 1–NE 4 are OptiX OSN 2500 NEs. Configure the Ethernet processing boardsthat support the RPR features for NE 1, NE 2 and NE 3. The EVPL services can then be provided.

Networking diagram for the EVPL services on an RPR

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 105: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-13 Networking diagram for the EVPL services on an RPR

NE 3

NE 2

OptiX OSNequipment

Department 1of company B

NE 1

NE 4 RPR

Upper layernetwork

GE

1 2 3

CompanyB

LSPn

CompanyC

4

Ethernetport

GE

FE FEFE

Department 2of company B

CompanyA

Application Scheme

Use the port+VLAN+MPLS routing scheme for the EVPL services on an RPR.

The service from company A is accessed from an FE port of NE 3.

The services of the two departments of company B are accessed from another FE port of NE 3.The services are isolated by VLAN IDs.

The service from company C is accessed from a GE port of NE 2.

All the services are converged at NE 1 and transmitted to the Ethernet equipment at the upperlayer though a GE port. The services share a 155M bandwidth.

Hardware Configuration

Configure one EGR2 board for NE 1 to converge and then transmit the Ethernet services to theEthernet equipment of the upper layer through a GE port.

Configure one EGR2 board for NE 2 to access the GE services from company C.

Configure one EMR0 board for NE 3 to access Ethernet services from companies A and B.

Service Route

Table 6-19 lists the service routes.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-37

Page 106: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Table 6-19 Routes for the EVPL services of the RPR boards

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2 NE 3

Company AEVPL 1

Port 1 (GE port)+MPLS label1←→RPR1 port+MPLS label1'RPR source node: 3

- Port 2 (FE port 1)←→RPR1 port+MPLS label1'RPR source node: 1

Company BEVPL 2

Port 1 (GE port)+MPLS label2+VLAN ID: 100←→RPR1port+MPLS label 2'+VLANID: 100RPR source node: 3

- Port 3 (FE port 2)+VLAN ID: 100←→RPR1 port+MPLS label2'RPR source node: 1

Company BEVPL 3

Port 1 (GE port)+MPLS label3+VLAN ID: 200←→RPR1port+MPLS label 3'+VLANID: 200RPR source node: 3

- Port 3 (FE port 2)+VLAN ID: 200←→RPR1 port+MPLS label3'RPR source node: 1

Company CEVPL 4

Port 1 (GE port)+MPLS label4←→RPR1 port+MPLS label4'RPR source node: 2

Port 1 (GEport)←→RPR1 port+MPLS label4'RPR sourcenode: 1

-

6.7.4 Planning EVPLAN Services for RPR BoardsThe EVPLAN services for RPR boards ban be used to plan the RPR services.

Service Requirement

The community services are accessed from NE 1, NE 2 and NE 3 at different places. Thecommunity users at the three places should be able to communicate with each other. Thecommunity services are converged at NE 1 and then transmitted to the backbone Ethernetequipment through GE interfaces. The common services are accessed from NE 1, NE 2 and NE3 at different places. The users at the three places should be able to communicate with each other.The common services are converged at NE 1 and then transmitted to the backbone Ethernetequipment through GE interfaces. The Ethernet equipment at place A supports the stack VLANtags. The community services and the common services should be isolated from each other butshare the 2 x VC-4 bandwidth. Effective protection should be provided to the Ethernet servicesand the protection switching time should be less than 50 ms.

The community services include video and virtual private network (VPN) services. The commonservices include IP phone and cyber cafe services, which require different priorities. For videoand IP phone services, the bandwidth should be guaranteed and the jitter should be kept undera proper level. For the VPN service, the bandwidth should be guaranteed and extra servicesshould be transmitted with the best effort. The cyber cafe services should be transmitted withthe best effort.

The VLAN tags can be used to isolate different services at the same place.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 107: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Networking ApplicationThe previous service requirements are listed as follows:

l The bandwidth should be dynamically shared by multiple nodes.

l Services must be isolated.

l The protection at the Ethernet layer must be provided.

l Services of different QoS must be provided according to the service type.

To meet the previous requirements, you can use an RPR to carry the EVPLAN services.

In Figure 6-14, NE 1–NE 4 are OptiX OSN 2500 NEs. Configure the Ethernet processing boardsthat support the RPR features for the four NEs. The EVPLAN services can then be provided.

Figure 6-14 Networking diagram for EVPLAN services on an RPR

OptiX OSNequipment

RPR

Internet

GE

Commonuser

CommunityuserLSP

GE FEFE

FE

FE GE

FE

FEFE

NE 1(Place A)

RPR1

NE 2(Place B)

NE 3(Place C)

NE 4(Place D)

Ethernetport

Application SchemeUse the VB+VLAN+stack VLAN routing scheme for the EVPLAN service on an RPR.

Use stack VLAN tags to identify different user domains (pink and blue) and use VLAN tags ofVBs to further identify different users. The VB ports in different stack VLAN domains can sharethe same VLAN tag. Figure 6-15 shows the details.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-39

Page 108: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-15 Networking diagram for EVPLAN services on an RPR

NE 2RPR

Internet

GE

Ethernetport

NE 1

NE 3

RPR1

VLAN 1 VLAN 2

VLAN 1

VLAN 1

VLAN 2

VLAN 1VLAN 1

VLAN 1

VLAN 2NE 4VB1

VB2VB1VB2

VB1 VB2

VB1 VB2

NE 4

Commonuser

CommunityuserOptiX OSN equipmentLSP

As shown in Figure 6-15, two stack VLAN domains are present on the RPR. The user domainmarked in pink is stack VLAN 2 and the user domain marked in blue is stack VLAN 1. Theservices of stack VLAN 1 and stack VLAN 2 are actually two EVPLAN services. VB 1 for theEVPLAN 1 service belongs to stack VLAN 1 and VB 2 of the EVPLAN 2 service belongs tostack VLAN 2. Each VC may include several VLANs, such as VLAN 1 and VLAN 2. The RPR1 port belongs to all stack VLAN domains. All services are finally connected to the Internetthrough NE 1.

You can set a priority for each port on the RPR. Hence, services of different QoS can be provided(three priorities).

Hardware ConfigurationConfigure one EGR2 board for NE 1 to converge and then transmit services to the Ethernetequipment at the upper layer through a GE port.

Configure one EMR0 board for NE 2 to access community services and common FE services.

Configure one EMR0 board for NE 3 to access community services and common FE services.

Configure one EMR0 board for NE 4 to access community services and common FE services.

Service RouteTable 6-20 lists the service routes.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 109: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Table 6-20 Routes of the EVPLAN services for the RPR boards

RouteLocation

ServiceRequirement

Route

NE 1 Commonservices

VB1: Port 1 (stack VLAN tag 1), RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 1)VLAN ID: 1 filter table (Port 1, RPR1)VLAN ID: 2 filter table(Port 1, RPR1)

Communityservices

VB2: Port 1 (stack VLAN tag 2), RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 2)VLAN ID: 1 filter table (Port 1, RPR1)VLAN ID: 2 filter table(Port 1, RPR1)

NE 2 Commonservices

VB1: Port 2, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 1)VLAN ID: 1 filter table(Port 2, RPR1)VLAN ID: 2 filter table (Port 2, RPR1)

Communityservices

VB2: Port 3, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 2)VLAN ID: 1 filter table(Port 3, RPR1)

NE 3 Commonservices

VB1: Port 2, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 1)VLAN ID: 1 filter table(Port 2, RPR1)

Communityservices

VB2: Port 3, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 2)VLAN ID: 1 filter table(Port 3, RPR1)VLAN ID: 2 filter table (Port 3, RPR1)

NE 4 Commonservices

VB1: Port 2, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 1)VLAN ID: 1 filter table(Port 2, RPR1)VLAN ID: 2 filter table (Port 2, RPR1)

Communityservices

VB2: Port 3, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 2)VLAN ID: 1 filter table(Port 3, RPR1)

6.8 Planning ATM and IMA ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple ATM and IMA services. When planning the ATM andIMA services, follow the basic principles.

6.8.1 Capability of Supporting the ATM and IMA ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the ATM services, such as the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR.

6.8.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the ATM and IMA services, follow the basic principles and select thecorresponding service types according to the actual network situation.

6.8.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted ATM ServicesThe method of planning the transparently transmitted ATM services is defined.

6.8.4 Planning Multicast ATM ServicesThe method of planning the multicast ATM services is defined.

6.8.5 Planning Statistically Multiplexed ATM ServicesThe method of planning the statistically multiplexed ATM services is defined.

6.8.6 Planning IMA ServicesThe method of planning the IMA services is defined.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-41

Page 110: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6.8.1 Capability of Supporting the ATM and IMA ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the ATM services, such as the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR.

The OptiX OSN 2500 provides four ATM boards, which are the ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1.The IDL4 and IDQ1 support the IMA function. Table 6-21 lists the features of the ADL4 andADQ1. Table 6-22 lists the features of the IDL4 and IDQ1.

Table 6-21 Features of the ADL4 and ADQ1

Function ADL4 ADQ1

Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1

Optical interfacespecification

S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, andVe-4.2

Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, andVe-1.2

E3 ATM interface Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, orN1PL3A board.

IMA Not supported

Maximum uplinkbandwidth

8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4

ATM switchingcapability

1.2 Gbit/s

Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (x≤4)

Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR

Number of ATMconnections

2048

Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0

Supported ATMmulticast connections

Spatial multicast and logical multicast

ATM protection (ITU-TI.630)

Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring

OAM function (ITU-T I.610)

AIS, RDI, LB (loopback), CC (continuity check)

Table 6-22 Features of the IDL4 and IDQ1

Function N1IDL4 N1IDQ1

Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1

Optical interfacespecification

S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, andVe-1.2

E3 ATM interface Not supported

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 111: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Function N1IDL4 N1IDQ1

IMA (compliant withATM Forum IMA 1.1standards)

l Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1processing board N1PQ1, N1PQM, or N2PQ1.

l Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.

l Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to theATM port. Each IMA group supports 1–32 E1 services.

l Supports the mapping of a maximum of 63 E1 links (which arenot in any IMA group) to the ATM port.

l Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.

Maximum uplinkbandwidth

8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4

ATM switchingcapability

1.2 Gbit/s

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (x≤4)

Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR

Number of ATMconnections

2048

Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0

Supported ATMmulticast connections

Spatial multicast and logical multicast

ATM protection (ITU-T I.630)

Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring

OAM function (ITU-TI.610)

AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check)

Board level 1+1protection

Supported, with switching time less than 1s

6.8.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the ATM and IMA services, follow the basic principles and select thecorresponding service types according to the actual network situation.

Basic Planning PrinciplesChoose the proper optical modules according to the transmission distance.

When the E3 ATM service is accessed, configure the ATM processing board for the E3 service.

When an IMA board is used to process the IMA service, configure an E1 service processingboard.

The ATM service can be protected by using the protection schemes for the SDH network. It isrecommended to use a bidirectional MSP ring and a VP-Ring or VC-Ring for networking. In

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-43

Page 112: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

this way, if the SDH network does not provide any protection, you can use the VP-Ring or VC-Ring protection to protect the ATM service.

According to the importance of the service, decide whether to use the 1+1 protection for theIMA boards.

Set the traffic parameters according to the service type.

Selection of Application SchemesBoth the ATM and IMA boards support the transparent transmission, multicast and statisticalmultiplexing of the ATM service.

The basic function of the MSTP equipment is to transparently transmit ATM services in a point-to-point manner. This function has the following features:

l The bandwidth of the SDH equipment is used exclusively and thus the bandwidth utilizationis of a low rate.

l The protection schemes for the SDH network are used to provide the SDH-layer protection.As a result, the reliability is increased.

The multicast is a point-to-point application scheme. For example, a message is transmitted fromthe central node to other nodes in the network. The multicast services are carried by the SDHnetwork. Each multicast service uses a specific bandwidth exclusively and thus the bandwidthutilization is of a low rate.

The statistical multiplexing of the ATM services is widely used to statistically multiplex ATMservices accessed from different nodes into one VC-4. The VC-4s are converged to one port ofthe central node and then transmitted to the ATM switch at the upper layer. In this way, boththe bandwidth resource and the port resource are saved.

6.8.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted ATM ServicesThe method of planning the transparently transmitted ATM services is defined.

Service RequirementThe ATM switch at one place needs to communicate with the ATM switch at another place. Thebandwidth is 100 Mbit/s. The ATM switch provides 155 Mbit/s optical interfaces and the servicetype is CBR.

The services between the two places are important and must be protected.

Networking ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to transmit the ATM services between the two places. Figure6-16 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-16 Figure 6-19 Networking diagram for transparent transmission of ATM services

MSTP network

MSTP

ATMswitch

155 Mbit/s opticalinterface

Working trail

Protection trailNE 1 NE 2

ATMswitch

155 Mbit/s opticalinterface

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 113: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Use two OptiX OSN 2500 systems at the two places and the two systems are named NE 1 andNE 2. Each OptiX OSN 2500 NE is connected to the 155 Mbit/s optical interface of the ATMswitch.

The ATM services between NE 1 and NE 2 must be protected. For this purpose, configure aworking trail and a protection trail in the MSTP network. Configure the service as a pass-throughservice at the SDH NEs that the working trail and the protection trail involve.

Application Scheme

Use the point-to-point transparent transmission scheme.

The protection in the SDH network can be used to protect the service.

Hardware Configuration

Configure one ADQ1 for both NE 1 and NE 2 to access the 155 Mbit/s ATM service from theATM switch.

NOTE

The ATM 155 Mbit/s optical interface shares the same features with the SDH STM-1 optical interface. IfMSTP equipment is not required to process the ATM service, you can use the SDH line board, such as theSLQ1, instead of the ATM board.

Service Route

Table 6-23 lists the service routes.

Table 6-23 Routes for transparently transmitted ATM services

Route Type NE 1 NE 2

Working route ATM external port1←→ATMinternal port 1←→VC-4 (workingtrail)

VC-4 (working trail)←→ATM internal port 1←→ATM external port 1

Protection route ATM external 1←→ATM internalport 2←→VC-4(protection trail)

VC-4 (protection trail)←→ATM internal port2←→ATM external port 1

NOTE

The ATM external port is also the external optical interface where ATM services are accessed. The ATMinternal port is the logical port VCTRUNK, which is the port used to connect the ATM processing moduleand the SDH cross-connect module.

The VPI and VCI for the working route and the protection route can be the same or can be different.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-45

Page 114: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6.8.4 Planning Multicast ATM ServicesThe method of planning the multicast ATM services is defined.

Service RequirementThe ATM service (TV program) at place A needs to be transmitted to places B, C and D in aunidirectional manner. The ATM service is from the ATM switch and the bandwidth for theservice is 50 Mbit/s.

The ATM switch provides 155 Mbit/s optical interfaces and the service is of the CBR type.

Networking ApplicationThe ATM processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 support the unidirectional multicast of theATM services.

Figure 6-17 shows the networking diagram.

Four OptiX OSN 2500 systems are used as NE 1, NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 at the four placesrespectively. NE 1 at place A is the central node, which receives the ATM service from the ATMswitch and then multicasts the ATM service to NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4.

NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 receive the multicast ATM service transmitted from the ATM switch.

Figure 6-17 Figure 6-20 Networking diagram for the multicast ATM services

NE 2(place B)

STM-4 two-fiberunprotected ring

NE 1(place A)

OptiX OSNequipment ATM switch DSLAM

155M opticalinterfaces

(1,32)

(1,33)

(1,34)

The numbers in the bracketindicates the VPI and VCI

values respectively.

NE 3(place C)

NE 4(place D)

155M opticalinterfaces

155M opticalinterfaces

155M opticalinterfaces

Application SchemeThe point-to-point multicast scheme is used first to duplicate the service from the ATM switchand then to transmit the service to NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 115: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Hardware Configuration

For NE 1, configure one ADQ1, which is used to access the 155 Mbit/s ATM service from theATM switch.

For each of NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4, configure one ADQ1 board, which is used to receive themulticast service from NE 1.

Service Route

Table 6-24 lists the service routes.

Table 6-24 Routes for multicast ATM services

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4

NE 1 to NE2

Root connection:ATM externalport 1 (1, 32)→ATM internalport 1 (1, 32)→VC-4 (No.1)

p2p connection:VC-4 (No.1)→ATM internal port 1(1, 32)→ATMexternal port 1 (1,32)

- -

NE 1 to NE3

Leaveconnection:ATM externalport 1 (1, 32)→ATM internalport 2 (1, 33)→VC-4 (No.2)

VC-4 pass-through P2P connection:VC-4 (No.2)→ATM internal port1 (1, 33)→ATMexternal port 1 (1,33)

-

NE 1 to NE4

Leaveconnection:ATM externalport 1 (1, 32)→ATM internalport 3 (1, 34)→VC-4 (No.3)

- - p2pconnection:VC-4 (No.3)→ATMinternal port 1(1, 34)→ATMexternal port 1(1, 34)

NOTE

The external ATM port is also the external optical interface where ATM services are accessed. The internalATM port is the logical port VCTRUNK, which is the port used to connect the ATM processing moduleand the SDH cross-connect module.

The ATM service that NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 receive is duplicated at the central node, NE 1. Hence, it isrequired to create one root connection and two unidirectional leaf connections at NE 1. The ATM servicein the root connection cannot be duplicated for the leaf connections.

The VC connection is used. The numbers in the brackets are values of the VPI and VCI. For example, (1,32) indicates that the VPI value is 1 and the VCI value is 32.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-47

Page 116: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6.8.5 Planning Statistically Multiplexed ATM ServicesThe method of planning the statistically multiplexed ATM services is defined.

Service RequirementIn one city, a communication line is to be created and should cover places A, B, C and D. Theservices from the DSLAM nodes at places B, C and D should be transmitted to the ATM switchat place A. The ATM switch provides one 155 Mbit/s optical interface to access the ATM servicefrom each node. Table 6-25 lists the service requirements.

Table 6-25 Requirements for statistically multiplexing ATM services

TransmissionMode

Source Node SinkNode

Bandwidth

Point to point NE 2 provides 155 Mbit/s POS interfaces. NE 1 3 x 10 Mbit/s

Point to point NE 3 provides 155 Mbit/s POS interfaces. NE 1 2 x 20 Mbit/s

Point to point NE 4 provides 155 Mbit/s and 34 Mbit/sPOS interfaces.

NE 1 1 x 30 Mbit/s1 x 20 Mbit/s

The ATM service at each node is of the CBR type.

The ATM service must be protected.

Networking ApplicationThe total bandwidth for the ATM services converged to NE 1 is 120 Mbit/s (3 x 10 Mbit/s + 2x 20 Mbit/s + 30 Mbit/s + 20 Mbit/s). The ATM services can share a VC-4 bandwidth.

The OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to transmit and converge the data services. The ATM servicescan be statistically multiplexed in a point-to-point manner and share a bandwidth on the ring.The OptiX OSN 2500 is used as a multi-service transmission platform (MSTP) to transmit andconverge ATM services.

Figure 6-18 shows the networking diagram.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 117: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-18 Networking diagram for the statistically multiplexed ATM services

Two-fiberbidirectional

MSP ring

OptiX OSNequipment ATM switch DSLAM

10M

10M

10M

20M 20M

30M

20M

155M opticalinterfaces

(1,0)(2,0)(3,0)

(4,0)(5,0)

(6,0)(7,0)

NE 1(place A)

NE 2(place B)

NE 3(place C)

NE 4(place D)

Four OptiX OSN 2500 systems are used at the four places and are named NE 1, NE 2, NE 3 andNE 4 respectively. NE 1 is the central node, which receives and converges the ATM servicesfrom other nodes, and then transmits the ATM services to the ATM switch.

NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 receive the ATM services from the DSLAM nodes and then multiplex theATM services into one VC-4. The VC-4 is then transmitted to the central node, NE 1.

Application SchemeThe statistical multiplexing scheme is used to statistically multiplex the ATM services accessedfrom NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 into one VC-4. The ATM services are converged to one port of NE1 and then transmitted to the ATM switch at the upper layer.

The two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection can be used to protect the ATM services withthe switching time being less than 50 ms.

Hardware ConfigurationFor NE 1, configure one ADQ1 board, which is used to converge the ATM services from eachnode and transmit the ATM services to the ATM switch at the upper layer through a 155 Mbit/s port.

For each of the NEs, NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4, configure one ADQ1 board, which is used to receivethe ATM services from the DSLAM nodes.

For NE 4, configure one ADQ1 board and one PL3 board, which are jointly used to access the34 Mbit/s ATM services. The ATM services can then share the bandwidth on the ring.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-49

Page 118: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Service RouteTable 6-26 lists the service routes.

Table 6-26 Routes for the statistically multiplexed ATM services

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4

NE 1 toNE 2

ATM externalport 1 (1–3, 0)←→ATMinternal port 1(1–3, 0)←→VC-4 (No.1)

10 Mbit/s service 1:ATM external port 1(1, 0)←→ATMinternal port 1 (1, 0)←→VC-4 (No.1)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 2(1–3, 0)←→ATM internalport 2 (1–3, 0)←→VC-4 (No.1)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 1 (1–3, 0)←→ATMinternal port 2 (1–5, 0)←→VC-4(No.1)10 Mbit/s service 2:

ATM external port 2(2, 0)←→ATMinternal port 1 (2, 0)←→VC-4 (No.1)

10 Mbit/s service 3:ATM external port 3(3, 0)←→ATMinternal port 1 (3, 0)←→VC-4 (No.1)

E 1 to NE3

ATM externalport 1 (4–5, 0)←→ATMinternal port 1(4–5, 0)←→VC-4 (No.1)

- 20 Mbit/sservice 1: ATMexternal port 1(4, 0)←→ATM internalport 2 (4, 0)←→VC-4 (No.1)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 1 (4–5, 0)←→ATMinternal port 2 (4–5, 0)←→VC-4(No.1)

- 20 Mbit/sservice 2: ATMexternal port 2(5, 0)←→ATM internalport 2 (5, 0)←→VC-4 (No.1)

NE 1 toNE 4

ATM externalport 1 (6–7, 0)←→ATMinternal port 1(6–7, 0)←→VC-4 (No.1)

- - 20 Mbit/s service1: PL3 interface←→ATM internalport 3 (6, 0)←→ATM internal port2 (6, 0)←→VC-4(No.1)

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 119: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

RouteLocation

NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4

30 Mbit/s service1: ATM externalport 1 (7, 0)←→ATM internal port2 (7, 0)←→VC-4(No.1)

NOTE

The external ATM port is also the external optical interface where ATM services are accessed. The internalATM port is the logical port VCTRUNK, which is the port used to connect the ATM processing moduleand the SDH cross-connect module.

The VP connection is used. The numbers in the bracket are values of the VPI and VCI. For example, (1,0) indicates that the VPI value is 1 and the VCI value is 0.

6.8.6 Planning IMA ServicesThe method of planning the IMA services is defined.

Service Requirement

A radio network controller (RNC) is at place A. Three base station subsystems (BSSs) are atplaces B, C and D. The RNC needs to access the ATM services from the three BSSs. The RNCprovides one 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interface. At each BSS, the inverse multiplexing for ATM(IMA) scheme is used to access the ATM service at the rate of 2 Mbit/s.Table 6-27 lists therequirements for the IMA services among the nodes.

Table 6-27 Requirements for IMA services among the nodes

Requirement Type SourceNode

SinkNode

RequiredBandwidth at theSDH Side

32 x 2 Mbit/s point-to-point IMA services NE 2 NE 1 40 Mbit/s

16 x 2 Mbit/s point-to-point IMA services NE 3 NE 1 20 Mbit/s

32 x 2 Mbit/s point-to-point IMA services NE 4 NE 1 40 Mbit/s

The ATM service of each node is of the CBR type.

The ATM service must be protected.

Networking Application

The IMA boards and E1 interface boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to meet the servicerequirements. Figure 6-19 shows the networking diagram.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-51

Page 120: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-19 Networking diagram for the IMA services

Base Station Subsystem(BSS )

Two-fiber bidirectionalMSP ring

NE 1 (place A)

NE 2(place B)

NE 3(place C)

NE 4(place D)

OptiX OSNequipment

155 Mbit/s ATM

32 x IMAE1

1# VC-4

1# VC-4

Radio Network Controller(RNC)

16 x IMA E1

32 x IMA E1

(20x VC12) (30x VC12)1# VC-4

(50x VC12)1# VC-4

ATM service

Four OptiX OSN 2500 systems are used at the four places and are named NE 1, NE 2, NE 3 andNE 4 respectively. At NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4, the 2 Mbit/s ATM services are accessed from theBSSs. The ATM services are converged on the IMA board and then transmitted in the SDHnetwork in the same VC-4. At NE 1, the VC-4 is cross-connected to the ATM board, whichtransmits the ATM services to the RNC through the ATM optical interface.

Application Scheme

The IMA group + statistical multiplexing scheme is used for the IMA services.

At NE 2, perform the following operations in sequence:

l Set one IMA group on the IMA board to access 32 x 2 Mbit/s IMA services.

l Cross-connect the IMA group to a VC-4 internal port of the IMA board.

l Set the traffic volume of the internal port to 40 Mbit/s. The bandwidth is then aggregated.

l Cross-connect the internal port to one VC-4 at the SDH layer to transmit the IMA services.

At NE 3, perform the following operations in sequence:

l Set one IMA group on the IMA board to access 16 x 2 Mbit/s IMA services.

l Cross-connect the IMA group to a VC-4 internal port of the IMA board.

l Set the traffic volume of the interval port to 20 Mbit/s. The bandwidth is then aggregated.

l Converge 20 VC-12s of NE 2 to the same internal port.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 121: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Cross-connect the internal port to one VC-4 at the SDH layer to transmit the IMA services.

At NE 4, perform the following operations in sequence:

l Set one IMA group on the IMA board to access 32 x 2 Mbit/s IMA services.

l Cross-connect the IMA group to a VC-4 internal port of the IMA board.

l Set the traffic volume of the interval port to 40 Mbit/s. The bandwidth is then aggregated.

l Converge 30 VC-12s of NE 2 and NE 3 to the same internal port.

l Cross-connect the internal port to one VC-4 at the SDH layer to transmit the IMA services.

The MSP scheme in the SDH network can be used to protect the ATM services.

Hardware ConfigurationFor NE 1, configure one IDQ1, which is used to access the 155 Mbit/s ATM service from theATM switch.

For each of NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4, use one IDQ1, one PQ1 and two D75 boards to access the 2Mbit/s IMA service.

Service RouteTable 6-28 lists the routes for the IMA services.

Table 6-28 IMA service routes

RoutePosition

NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4

NE 1 toNE 2

ATM external port1 (1, 32)←→ATMinternal port 2 (1,32)←→VC-4 (No.1)

32 x IMA ←→PQ1←→ first IMAgroup (1, 32) ofIDQ1 internal port1←→ATM internalport 2 (1, 32)←→VC-4 (No.1)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 3(1, 32)←→ATM internalport 2 (1, 32)←→VC-4 (No.1)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 3 (1,32)←→ATMinternal port 2 (1,32)←→VC-4(No.1)

NE 1 toNE 3

ATM external port1 (1, 33)←→ATMinternal port 2 (1,33)←→VC-4 (No.1)

- 16 x IMA ←→PQ1←→firstIMA group (1,32) of IDQ1internal port 1←→ATM internalport 2 (1, 33)←→VC-4 (No.1)

Pass-throughservice: ATMinternal port 3 (1,33)←→ATMinternal port 2 (1,33)←→VC-4(No.1)

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-53

Page 122: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

RoutePosition

NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4

NE 1 toNE 4

ATM external port1 (1, 34)←→ATMinternal port 2 (1,34)←→VC-4 (No.1)

- - 32 x IMA ←→PQ1←→firstIMA group (1,34) of IDQ1internal port 1←→ATM internalport 2 (1, 34)←→VC-4 (No.1)

NOTE

The external ATM port of the IDQ1is also the external optical interface where ATM services are accessed.The internal ATM port is the logical port VCTRUNK, which is the port used to connect the ATM processingmodule and the SDH cross-connect module.

The numbers in the bracket are values of the VPI and VCI. For example, (1, 32) indicates that the VPIvalue is 1 and the VCI value is 32.

6.9 Planning SAN and Video ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple SAN and video services. When planning the SAN andvideo services, follow the basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actualnetwork situation.

6.9.1 Capability of Supporting SAN and Video ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the SAN and video services, such as the FC, FICON, ESCON,and DVB-ASI services.

6.9.2 Planning PrinciplesThe total bandwidth for the services accessed by the N1MST4 does not exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. Onlythe first and the second ports can be used to support the distance extension function at the SDHor client side.

6.9.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted SAN ServicesThe method of planning the transparently transmitted SAN services is defined.

6.9.1 Capability of Supporting SAN and Video ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the SAN and video services, such as the FC, FICON, ESCON,and DVB-ASI services.

The N1MST4 for the OptiX OSN 2500 supports transparent transmission of the SAN and videoservices. The details on the capability of the N1MST4 are shown as follows:

l Provide four stand-alone ports to access services.

l Support the FC service (FC100/FICON and FC2000) for four ports. The bandwidth is nomore than 2.5 Gbit/s. The FC service can be transmitted at the full rate. In other words, oneFC200 or two FC100 services are supported.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 123: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l The first and the second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side forFC100 and FC200 services. The FC100 service supports an extended distance of 3000 kmand the FC200 supports an extended distance of 1500 km.

l The first and the second ports support the distance extension function at the client side forFC100 and FC200 services. The FC100 service supports an extended distance of 40 kmand the FC200 supports an extended distance of 20 km.

l Provide four ports to support the ESCON or DVB-ASI service.l Encapsulate all services in the GFP-T format, which complies with ITU-T G.7041. Services

are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x: 4, 8 or 16).

Table 6-29 lists the services and their rates supported by the N1MST4 board.

Table 6-29 Services supported by the N1MST4 and their rates

Service Rate Remarks

FC100/FICON 1062.5 Mbit/s SAN service

FC200 2125 Mbit/s SAN service

ESCON 200 Mbit/s SAN service

DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service

6.9.2 Planning PrinciplesThe total bandwidth for the services accessed by the N1MST4 does not exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. Onlythe first and the second ports can be used to support the distance extension function at the SDHor client side.

6.9.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted SAN ServicesThe method of planning the transparently transmitted SAN services is defined.

Service RequirementThe headquarter of company A at NE 1 needs to back up the storage area network (SAN) serviceto one branch 10 km away from NE 1. The service to be backed up and transmitted is the 2 xESCON service.

Networking ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 2500 can transparently transmit SAN services such as the ESCON service.Figure 6-20 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-20 Networking diagram for transparently transmitting SAN services

Headquartersof company A NE 1 NE 2 Branch of

company A

OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user

2×ESCON2×ESCON

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-55

Page 124: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Application SchemeUse the SDH system to transmit the ESCON services and to map the ESCON services intoVC-4-4c.

The protection in the SDH network can be used to protect the ESCON services.

Hardware ConfigurationConfigure one MST4 for NE 1 to access the SAN service from the headquarters of company A.

Configure one MST4 for NE 2 to transmit the SAN service from the headquarters to the SANdevice for backup through an ESCON interface.

Service RouteTable 6-30 lists the service routes.

Table 6-30 Routes for transparently transmitted SAN services

Route Location NE 1 NE 2

NE 1 to NE 2 MST4 ports 1–2←→VC-4concatenation←→line

MST4 ports 1–2←→VC-4concatenation←→line

6.10 Planning DDN ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of DDN services. When planning the DDNservices, follow the basic principles.

6.10.1 Capability of Supporting DDN ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the DDN services, such as the N x 64 kbit/s (N: 1–31) serviceand framed E1 service.

6.10.2 Plannig PrinciplesThe planning the DDN should follow the basic principles.

6.10.3 Planning N x 64 kbit/s Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)The method of planning the point-to-point transmission of N x 64 kbit/s services is defined.

6.10.4 Planning Framed E1 Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)The method of planning the point-to-point transmission of framed E1 services is defined.

6.10.5 Planning N x 64 kbit/s and Framed E1 Services (Hybrid Transmission)The method of planning the hybrid transmission of N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1 services isdefined.

6.10.6 Planning Converged Framed E1 ServicesThe method of planning the converged framed E1 is defined.

6.10.7 Planning Converged N x 64 kbit/s ServicesThe method of planning the converged N x 64 kbit/s services is defined.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 125: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6.10.1 Capability of Supporting DDN ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports the DDN services, such as the N x 64 kbit/s (N: 1–31) serviceand framed E1 service.

The OptiX OSN 2500 uses the N1DM12, which is an interface board, to access DDN servicesand uses the N1DX1 and N1DXA, which are DDN processing boards, to process DDN services.Table 6-31 lists the features of the N1DX1, N1DXA and N1DM12.

Table 6-31 Features of the N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA

BoardFeature

N1DX1 (N1DM12) N1DXA

Processingcapability

Process 8 x N x 64 kbit/s and 8 x framedE1 services. Process the 48 x 64 kbit/scross-connections of the framed E1signals at the SDH side.

Process 63 x 64 kbit/s cross-connections of the framed signalsat the SDH side.

Bandwidth atthe SDH side

48 x E1. 63 x E1.

Interface type N x 64 kbit/s interface: RS232, RS449,EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.36, X.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4, non-CRC4.

-

Interfaceimpedance

75 or 120 ohms. -

Interfacemode

Interfaces provided by the N1DM12. -

Protection 1:N (N≤4) TPS with the switchingtime less than 50 ms.

Not supported.

Loopback Inloop and outloop for all ports.

PRBS self-test Supported. Not supported.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the following networking application schemes for DDN services:

l Point-to-point transmission of N x 64 kbit/s services

l Point-to-point transmission of framed E1 services

l Hybrid transmission of N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1 services

l Convergence of framed E1 services

l Convergence of N x 64 kbit/s services

6.10.2 Plannig PrinciplesThe planning the DDN should follow the basic principles.

When the DX1 is used to access N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1 services, the DM12 is required.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-57

Page 126: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

The DXA does not provide interfaces. Hence, the DXA is used only to cross-connect andconverge 63 x 64 kbit/s signals of framed E1 or fraction E1 services at the cross-connect side.

NOTE

Framed E1: Framed E1 indicates the standard E1 bit stream where the header signals are carried by theTS0 timeslot.

Fraction E1: Fraction E1 indicates that only some timeslots of the E1 are usable. Fraction E1 is a specialform of the framed E1.

6.10.3 Planning N x 64 kbit/s Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)The method of planning the point-to-point transmission of N x 64 kbit/s services is defined.

Service Requirement

One 4 x 64 kbit/s service is to be transmitted between the headquarters of company A, at NE 1,and a branch, at NE 2. The V.35 protocol is applied as the interface protocol.

Networking Application

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the point-to-point transmission of N x 64 kbit/s services. Figure6-21 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-21 Networking diagram for the N x 64 kbit/s service (point-to-point transmission)

Headquarters ofcompany A NE 1 NE 2 Branch of

company A

OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user

4 x 64k 4 x 64k

Application Scheme

The DM12 interface board first accesses the 4 x 64 kbit/s service and then the DX1 maps theservice into a VC-12, which is transmitted by a line board.

The protection in the SDH network is used to protect the 4 x 64 kbit/s service.

Hardware Configuration

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 1 to access the 4 x 64 kbit/s service from theheadquarters of company A.

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 2 to access the 4 x 64 kbit/s service from the branchof company A.

Service Route

Table 6-32 lists the service routes.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 127: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Table 6-32 Routes for the N x 64 kbit/s service (point-to-point transmission)

RoutePosition

NE 1 NE 2

NE 1 to NE 2 4 x 64 kit/s service←→DDN port ofthe DM12←→DX1←→ cross-connect board←→line

4 x 64 kit/s service←→DDNport of the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect board←→line

6.10.4 Planning Framed E1 Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)The method of planning the point-to-point transmission of framed E1 services is defined.

Service Requirement

One framed E1 service is to be transmitted between the headquarters of company A at one place,and a branch at another place. The V.35 protocol is applied as the interface protocol.

Networking Application

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the point-to-point transmission of N x 64 kbit/s services. Figure6-22 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-22 Networking diagram for the framed E1 service (point-to-point transmission)

Headquartersof company A NE 1 NE 2 Branch of

company A

OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user

FrameE1 Frame

E1

Application Scheme

The DM12 interface board first accesses the framed E1 service and then the DX1 maps theservice into a VC-12, which is transmitted by a line board.

Hardware Configuration

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 1 to access the framed E1 service from theheadquarters of company A.

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 2 to access the framed service from the branch ofcompany A.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-59

Page 128: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Service Route

Table 6-33 Routes for the framed E1 service (point-to-point transmission)

RoutePosition

NE 1 NE 2

NE 1 to NE 2 Frame E1 service←→Frame E1 portof the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect board←→line

Frame E1 service←→Frame E1port of the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect board←→line

6.10.5 Planning N x 64 kbit/s and Framed E1 Services (HybridTransmission)

The method of planning the hybrid transmission of N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1 services isdefined.

Service RequirementOne 4 x 64 kbit/s service is to be transmitted between the headquarters of company A, at NE 1and a branch, at NE 2. One framed E1 service is to be transmitted between the headquarters ofcompany B, at NE 1, and a branch, at NE 2.

Networking ApplicationFigure 6-23 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-23 Networking diagram for the framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/s services (hybridtransmission)

Enterprise user

Headquartersof company A

Headquartersof company B

Branch ofcompany A

Branch ofcompany B

4 x 64k

Frame E1

4 x 64k

Frame E1

OptiX OSNequipment

NE 1 NE 2

Application SchemeThe DM12 interface board first accesses the 4 x 64 kbit/s and the framed E1 services and thenthe DX1 maps the services into a VC-12, which is transmitted by a line board.

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 129: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

NOTE

If any spare 64 kbit/s timeslots (fraction E1) are present in the framed E1, the 4 x 64 kbit/s service can becombined with the fraction E1 and then mapped into a VC-12. In this way, the bandwidth is saved.

Hardware ConfigurationConfigure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 1 to access the 4 x 64 kbit/s service from theheadquarters of company A and the framed E1 service from the headquarters of company B.

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 2 to access the 4 x 64 kbit/s service from the branchof company A and the framed E1 service from the branch of company B.

Service RouteTable 6-34 lists the service routes.

Table 6-34 Routes for the 4 x 64 kbit/s and the framed E1 service (hybrid transmission)

RoutePosition

NE 1 NE 2

Company A:NE 1 to NE 2

4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN port ofthe DM12←→DX1←→cross-connectboard←→line

4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDNport of the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect board←→line

Company B:NE 1 to NE 2

Framed E1 service←→Framed E1 portof the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect board←→line

Framed E1 service←→FramedE1 port of the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect board←→line

6.10.6 Planning Converged Framed E1 ServicesThe method of planning the converged framed E1 is defined.

Service RequirementThe headquarters of company A is located at NE 1 and two departments are located at NE 2.Each department needs to transmit a framed E1 service to the headquarters.

Networking ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to meet the service requirement. The services from the twodepartments are converged at NE 2 and then transmitted to the headquarters through NE 1.Figure 6-24 shows the networking diagram.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-61

Page 130: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 6-24 Networking diagram for the converged framed E1 service

OptiX OSN equipment

Frame E1Frame E1

Headquartersof company A

NE 1 NE 2

Department 1of company A

Enterprise user

Frame E1

Department 2of company A

Application Scheme

The DX1 board of NE 1 maps the framed E1 service into a VC-12 and then transmits the VC-12to NE 2 through the SDH network.

The framed E1 signals are separated from the SDH service at NE 2. The DX1 board of NE 2then converts the framed E1 signals to framed E1 services, which are finally transmitted to thetwo departments.

Hardware Configuration

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 1 to access the framed E1 service from theheadquarters of company A.

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 2 to access the framed E1 service from the twodepartments of company A.

Service Route

Table 6-35 lists the service routes.

Table 6-35 Routes for the converted framed E1 services

Route Position NE 1 NE 2

Headquarters←→branch 1 (NE 1 to NE2)

Framed E1 service←→FramedE1 port of the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect board←→line

Framed E1 service←→FramedE1 port of the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect board←→line

Headquarters←→branch 2 (NE 1 to NE2)

Framed E1 service←→FramedE1 port of the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect board←→line

Framed E1 service←→FramedE1 port of the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect board←→line

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 131: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

6.10.7 Planning Converged N x 64 kbit/s ServicesThe method of planning the converged N x 64 kbit/s services is defined.

Service RequirementThe headquarters of company A is located at NE 1 and two branches are located at NE 2. Eachbranch needs to transmit an N x 64 kbit/s service to the headquarters.

Networking ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to meet the service requirement. The services from the twobranches are converged at NE 2 and then transmitted to the headquarters through NE 1. Figure6-25 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-25 Networking diagram for the converged N x 64 kbit/s services

OptiX OSN equipment

AHeadquarters

NE 1 NE 2

Enterprise user

4 x 64k

4 x 64k

8 x 64k

Department 2 ofcompany A

Department 1 ofcompany A

Application SchemeThe DX1 board of NE 1 maps the 8 x 64 kbit/s service into a VC-12 and then transmits theVC-12 to NE 2 through the SDH network.

The 64 kbit/s signals are separated from the SDH service at NE 2. The DX1 board of NE 2 thenconverts 64 kbit/s signals into two 4 x 64 kbit/s services for the two branches.

Hardware ConfigurationConfigure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 1 to access the 8 x 64 kbit/s service from theheadquarters of company A.

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 2 to access the 4 x 64 kbit/s service respectively fromthe two branches of company A.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-63

Page 132: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Service Route

Table 6-36 Routes for the converged N x 64 kbit/s services

Route Position NE 1 NE 2

Heardquarters←→branch 1 (NE 1 to NE2)

4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN ofthe DM12←→DX1 board←→cross-connect board←→line

4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN ofthe DM12←→DX1 board←→cross-connect board←→line

Heardquarters←→branch 2 (NE 1 to NE2)

4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN ofthe DM12←→DX1 board←→cross-connect board←→line

4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN ofthe DM12←→DX1 board←→cross-connect board←→line

6.11 Planning WDM ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of WDM services. When planning the WDMservices for different WDM boards, follow different principles.

6.11.1 Capability of Supporting WDM ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of WDM services.

6.11.2 Planning PrinciplesDifferent principles should be followed for different boards to plan the WDM services.

6.11.1 Capability of Supporting WDM ServicesThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of WDM services.

l Any adjacent wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be added or dropped. Theworking wavelength ranges from 1535.82 to 1560.61 nm and the spacing wavelength is100 GHz.

l The client-side wavelengths can be converted from or to the standard wavelengths thatcomply with ITU-T G.692. The signals are transparently transmitted.

For the OptiX OSN 2500, the boards that support the WDM services are as follows:

l N1MR2A, N1MR2C, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4, which areoptical add/drop multiplex boards

l N1LWX, which is an arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board

The optical add/drop multiplex boards have the following features:

l Any adjacent standard wavelengths can be added or dropped. The optical signals aretransparently transmitted and the wavelength ranges from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm.

l Each optical add/drop multiplex board can be used as an OTM or OADM node.

l Two MR2A boards can be cascaded to add or drop four wavelengths as an OTM node.

l Used with the LWX, each optical add/drop multiplex board can be used as an OADM node.

l The central wavelength complies with ITU-T Recommendations and the channel spacingis 100 GHz.

The N1LWX, an arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board, has the following features:

6 Planning ServicesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

6-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 133: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l The client-side wavelengths can be converted from or to the standard wavelengths thatcomply with ITU-T G.692 (DWDM). The signals are transparently transmitted.

l The regeneration, retiming and reshaping (3R) functions are provided the client-side signalswithin the range from 10 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s. For the signals, the clock is recovered andthe service rate is monitored.

l The central wavelength complies with ITU-T Recommendations and the channel spacingis 100 GHz.

l Two types of LWX boards are provided. One type is dual-fed and selective receiving andthe other is single-fed and single receiving. A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWXboard supports intra-board protection, and one board of this type can realize optical channelprotection. The single fed and single receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection,that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection.

6.11.2 Planning PrinciplesDifferent principles should be followed for different boards to plan the WDM services.

N1MR2A, N1MR2C, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4When using the N1MR2A, N1MR2C, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4,adhere to the following planning principles:

l When two wavelengths are multiplexed, the maximum transmission distance is 100 km ifno optical booster amplifier board is used.

l When four wavelengths are multiplexed, the maximum transmission distance is 65 km ifno optical booster amplifier board is used.

l To increase the transmission distance, use optical booster amplifier boards at both thereceive end and the transmit end.

l When four wavelengths are multiplexed, the wavelengths are 1552.52 nm, 1551.72 nm,1550.92 nm and 1550.12 nm. For the MR2, two adjacent wavelengths must be used.

l Control the input optical power for the MR2A and MR2C. When several wavelengths aremultiplexed, the input optical power should range from –2.7 dBm to –3.3 dBm. When asingle wavelength is multiplexed, the input optical power should range from –2.3 dBm to–2.9 dBm. Use attenuators to increase or decrease the input or output optical power.

l The MR2A and MR2C share the same features. The width of the front panel of the twoboards is different and so the two boards are housed in different slots. For details on validslots for boards, see 10 Planning Hardware

LWXWhen using the LWX board, adhere to the following principles:

l Choose the dual-fed and selective receiving or single-fed and single receiving type asrequired.

l The LWX supports the 1+1 board-level protection. Configure the protection if necessary.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-65

Page 134: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05
Page 135: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

About This Chapter

For the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the equipment-level protection and theplanning principles are defined.

7.1 Basic PrinciplesThe basic principles for planning equipment-level protection are defined.

7.2 Capabilities of Supporting Equipment-Level ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple equipment-level protection.

7.3 Planning the TPS Protection for the E1/T1 Service BoardsThe principles for planning the protection for the E1/T1 service boards are defined.

7.4 Planning the TPS Protection for the E3/T3 Service BoardsThe principles for planning the protection for the E3/T3 service boards are defined.

7.5 Planning the TPS Protection for the E4 Service BoardsThe principles for planning the protection for E4 service boards are defined.

7.6 Planning the TPS Protection for the STM-1 Electrical Interface Service BoardsWhen planning the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards, considerthe capabilities of supporting the TPS protection and planning principles.

7.7 Planning the TPS Protection for the Ethernet BoardsWhen planning the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the TPS protection and planning principles.

7.8 Planning the BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet BoardsWhen planning the BPS/PPS protection for the Ethernet boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the BPS/PPS protection and planning principles.

7.9 Planning the 1+1 Protection for the ATM BoardsWhen planning the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, consider the capabilities of supportingthe 1+1 protection and planning principles.

7.10 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN ServiceThe DDN is a type of low-rate data service. The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the TPS for the DDNservices.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

Page 136: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

7.11 Planning the TPS Protection for the Hybrid ServiceThrough rational planning, the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the coexistence of TPS protectiongroups for different services, and thus the protection is effective.

7 Planning Equipment-Level ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 137: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

7.1 Basic PrinciplesThe basic principles for planning equipment-level protection are defined.

Adhere to the following principles when planning equipment-level protection.

l Important boards, such as the power supply and cross-connect boards, need equipment-level protection scheme.

l Important services need equipment-level protection.

7.2 Capabilities of Supporting Equipment-Level ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple equipment-level protection.

Table 7-1 lists the capabilities of the OptiX OSN 2500 of supporting equipment-level protection.

Table 7-1 Capabilities of supporting equipment-level protection

Protection Object Protection Scheme ConfigurationRequirement

Revertiveor Non-Revertive

–48 V power interfaceunit, PIU

1+1 backup Required. -

Line, SCC, and cross-connect and timingboard

1+1 backup Required. Non-revertive

E1/T1 serviceprocessing board

1:N (N≤4) tributaryprotection switching(TPS)

See 7.3 Planning theTPS Protection for theE1/T1 Service Boards

Revertive

E3/T3 serviceprocessing board

1:1 TPS See 7.4 Planning theTPS Protection for theE3/T3 Service Boards

Revertive

E4 service processingboard

1:1 TPS See 7.5 Planning theTPS Protection for theE4 Service Boards

Revertive

STM-1 electricalinterface and serviceprocessing board

1:1 TPS See 7.6 Planning theTPS Protection for theSTM-1 ElectricalInterface ServiceBoards

Revertive

Ethernet serviceprocessing boards,N2EFS0 and N4EFS0

1:1 TPS See 7.7 Planning theTPS Protection for theEthernet Boards

Revertive

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

Page 138: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Protection Object Protection Scheme ConfigurationRequirement

Revertiveor Non-Revertive

Ethernet serviceprocessing boards,N1EMS4, N3EGS4and N1EGS4

1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS See 7.8 Planning theBPS/PPS Protection forthe Ethernet Boards

Non-revertive

ATM serviceprocessing boards,N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1

1+1 backup See 7.9 Planning the 1+1Protection for the ATMBoards

Non-revertive

DDN serviceprocessing board,N1DX1

1:N (N≤4) TPS See 7.10 Planning theTPS Protection for theDDN Service

Revertive

WDM serviceprocessing board,N1LWX

1+1 backup Optional. Non-revertive

3.3 V power of boards 1:N centralized backup(supported by default)

Not needed. -

NOTE

Using the power backup unit on the Q1SAP or Q2SAP board, the OptiX OSN 2500 provides reliable powerbackup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards, including the SCC and service boards.

7.3 Planning the TPS Protection for the E1/T1 Service BoardsThe principles for planning the protection for the E1/T1 service boards are defined.

7.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E1/T1 Service BoardsWhen planning the TPS protection for the E1/T1 service boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the TPS protection.

7.3.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the TPS protection for the E1/T1 services, follow the basic principles.

7.3.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E1/T1 services.

7.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E1/T1Service Boards

When planning the TPS protection for the E1/T1 service boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the TPS protection.

The N1PQ1, N2PQ1 and N1PQM boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 all support one 1:N (N≤4)TPS protection group for the E1/T1 service. When the slots on the subrack of the OptiX OSN2500 are divided, the R1PD1 and R2PD1 boards support two 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection groupsfor the E1 service.

7 Planning Equipment-Level ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 139: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

NOTEThe N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.

7.3.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the TPS protection for the E1/T1 services, follow the basic principles.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of theservices.

l When configuring the TPS protection for the E1/T1 service, select the N1PQM board asthe processing board, and select the D12S as the interface board.

l If the TPS protection is required for the E1 service after the slots of the subrack are divided,select the R1PD1 or R2PD1 as the processing board, and the D75S or D12S as the interfaceboard.

l The slot for the protection board is slot 5. The slots for the working boards are slots 6–7,and 12–13.

l When the slots on the subrack are divided, two 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection groups for theE1 service can be configured as follows:– For the protection group 1, the slot for the protection board is slot 5, and the slots for

the working boards are slots 6–7.– For the protection group 2, the slot for the protection board is slot 19, and the slots for

the working boards are slots 20–21.

7.3.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E1/T1 services.

Figure 7-1 shows the configuration of a 1:4 TPS protection group for the E1/T1 service beforethe slots are divided.

Figure 7-1 TPS configuration for the E1/T1 service before the division of slots

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT

10

SLOT

13

SLOT

14

SLOT

12

SLOT8

SLOT

11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT

15

SLOT

16

SLOT

17

SLOT

18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

PQ1/

PQM

(P)

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

D12

S

D12

S

D12

S

D12

S

D12

S

D12

S

D12

S

D12

S

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

W: Working boardP: Protection board

Figure 7-2 shows the configuration of a 1:2 TPS protection group for the E1 service after theslots are divided.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

Page 140: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 7-2 TPS configuration for the E1 service after the division of slots

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

PD1

(P)

D12

S/D

75S

D12

S/D

75S

D12

S/D

75S

D12

S/D

75S

S19

S20

S21

S5

S6

S7

PD1

(W)

PD1

(W)

PD1

(P)

PD1

(W)

PD1

(W)

W: Working boardP: Protection board

7.4 Planning the TPS Protection for the E3/T3 Service BoardsThe principles for planning the protection for the E3/T3 service boards are defined.

7.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E3/T3 Service BoardsWhen planning the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the TPS protection.

7.4.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the TPS protection.

7.4.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E3/T3 services.

7.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E3/T3Service Boards

When planning the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the TPS protection.

The E3/T3 service boards for the OptiX OSN 2500, such as the N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, N2PL3,and N2PQ3 support two 1:1 TPS protection groups.

7.4.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the TPS protection.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of theservices.

l Configure the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service.

7 Planning Equipment-Level ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 141: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

– Choose the N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, or N2PL3 as the processing board, N1C34S asthe interface board, and N1TSB8 or N1TSB4 as the switching and bridging board.

– Choose the N2PQ3 as the processing board, N1D34S as the interface board, andN1TSB8 as the switching and bridging board.

l When the N1PL3 is the working board, the protection board can be the N1PD3 or N2PD3.

l When the slot for the protection board is slot 6, the slot for the working board is slot 7.When the slot for the protection board is slot 13, the slot for the working board is slot 12.

7.4.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E3/T3 services.

Figure 7-3 shows the configuration of two 1:1 TPS protection groups for the E3/T3 serviceboards, such as the N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, and N2PL3.

Figure 7-3 Configuration of the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service (1)

W: Working boardP: Protection board

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT

13

SLOT

14

SLOT

12

SLOT8

SLOT

11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT

15

SLOT

16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

PD3/

PL3(

W)

PD3/

PL3(

W)

PD3/

PL3(

P)

PD3/

PL3(

P)

D34

S/C

34S

D34

S/C

34S

TSB

8

TSB

8

Figure 7-4 shows the configuration of two 1:1 TPS protection groups for the N2PQ3 E3/T3service board.

NOTE

When configuring the TPS protection for the N2PQ3 board, use two N1TSB8 boards to work with theN2PQ3 board.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7

Page 142: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 7-4 Configuration of the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service (2)

W: Working boardP: Protection board

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT

10

SLOT

13

SLOT

14

SLOT

12

SLOT8

SLOT

11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT

15

SLOT

16

SLOT

17

SLOT

18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

PQ3(

W)

PQ3(

W)

PQ3(

P)

PQ3(

P)

D34

S

D34

S

TSB

8

TSB

8

TSB

8

D34

S

D34

S

TSB

8

7.5 Planning the TPS Protection for the E4 Service BoardsThe principles for planning the protection for E4 service boards are defined.

7.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E4 Service BoardsWhen planning the TPS protection for the E4 service boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the TPS protection.

7.5.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the TPS protection for the E4 services, follow the basic principles.

7.5.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E4 services.

7.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E4Service Boards

When planning the TPS protection for the E4 service boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the TPS protection.

The E4 service boards for the OptiX OSN 2500, such as the N1SPQ4 and N2SPQ4, support two1:1 TPS protection groups.

7.5.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the TPS protection for the E4 services, follow the basic principles.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of theservices.

l When the slot for the protection board is slot 6, the slot for the working board is slot 7.When the slot for the protection board is slot 13, the slot for the working board is slot 12.

7 Planning Equipment-Level ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 143: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

7.5.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E4 services.

Figure 7-5 shows the configuration of two 1:3 TPS protection groups for the E4 service.

Figure 7-5 TPS configuration for the E4 service

W: Working boardP: Protection board

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

SPQ

4(W

)

SPQ

4(W

)

SPQ

4(P)

SPQ

4(P)

MU

04

MU

04

TSB

8

TSB

8

7.6 Planning the TPS Protection for the STM-1 ElectricalInterface Service Boards

When planning the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards, considerthe capabilities of supporting the TPS protection and planning principles.

7.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the STM-1 Electrical Interface ServiceBoardsThe N1SEP, the STM-1 service board for the OptiX OSN 2500, supports two 1:1 TPS protectiongroups.

7.6.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planing the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards, follow thebasic principles.

7.6.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface serviceboards.

7.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the STM-1Electrical Interface Service Boards

The N1SEP, the STM-1 service board for the OptiX OSN 2500, supports two 1:1 TPS protectiongroups.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-9

Page 144: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

7.6.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planing the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards, follow thebasic principles.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the TPS protection for the STM-1 electricalinterface service boards.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS according to the importance of the services.

l When the N1SEP1 board works with the interface board to provide optical interfaces,choose the N1SEP.

l When configuring the TPS protection group for the STM-1 electrical interface serviceboard, choose the N1SEP as the processing board, N1EU08 as the interface board, andN1TSB8 or N1TSB4 as the switching and bridging board.

l When the slot for the protection board is slot 6, the slot for the working board is slot 7.When the slot for the protection board is slot 13, the slot for the working board is slot 12.

7.6.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface serviceboards.

Figure 7-6 shows the configuration of two 1:1 TPS protection groups for the STM-1 electricalinterface service boards.

Figure 7-6 TPS configuration for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards

Fiber routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

SEP(

W)

SEP(

W)

SEP(

P)

SEP(

P)

EU08

EU08

TSB

8

TSB

8

P: Protection board W: Working board

7.7 Planning the TPS Protection for the Ethernet BoardsWhen planning the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the TPS protection and planning principles.

7.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the Ethernet BoardsThe N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 support a 1:1 TPS protection group.

7 Planning Equipment-Level ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 145: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

7.7.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planing the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards, follow the basic principles.

7.7.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards.

7.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the EthernetBoards

The N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 support a 1:1 TPS protection group.

7.7.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planing the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards, follow the basic principles.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of theservices.

l When configuring the TPS protection group for the Ethernet service boards, choose theN2EFS0 or N4EFS0 as the processing board, N1ETS8 as the interface board, and N1TSB8as the switching and bridging board.

l The slot for the protection board is slot 13. The slot for the working board is slot 12.

7.7.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards.

Figure 7-7 shows the configuration of a 1:1 TPS protection group for the EFS0 board.

Figure 7-7 TPS configuration for the Ethernet boards

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

EFS0

(W)

EFS0

(P)

ETS8

TSB

8

P: Protection board W: Working board

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-11

Page 146: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

7.8 Planning the BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet BoardsWhen planning the BPS/PPS protection for the Ethernet boards, consider the capabilities ofsupporting the BPS/PPS protection and planning principles.

7.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet BoardsThe N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 support the BPS or PPSprotection.

7.8.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planing the BPS and PPS protection for the Ethernet boards, follow the basic principles.

7.8.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the BPS/PPS protection for the Ethernet boards.

7.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the BPS/PPS Protection for theEthernet Boards

The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 support the BPS or PPSprotection.

l The BPS protection, which mainly uses an active board and a standby board, is based onboards.

l The PPS protection, which mainly uses an active board and a standby board, is based onports between boards

7.8.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planing the BPS and PPS protection for the Ethernet boards, follow the basic principles.

l Determine whether to configure the BPS or PPS protection according to the importance ofthe services.

l The BPS and PPS protection schemes cannot be configured for the EMS4 or EGS4 boardat the same time.

l When the BPS or PPS protection switching occurs, the following requirements should bemet:– The equipment interconnected to the protection group should share the same working

mode as that of the protection group.– The transmit end and the receive end should be connected by optical fibers or crossover

cables. The two ends should not be connected by other equipment.– Before the protection group is deleted at the receive end, do not change the working

mode. Otherwise, the protection group works abnormally.l When configuring the BPS/PPS protection for the Ethernet boards, choose the N1EMS4,

N1EGS4 or N3EGS4 as the processing board. If an interface board is required, use theN1ETF8 or N1EFF8.

l The access capacity of the slot for the protection board should equal or exceed that of theslot for the working board.

l The optical interface board for the protection board and the working board should be thesame.

7 Planning Equipment-Level ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 147: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Compared with the BPS protection, the PPS protection reduces the effect on the externalsystem and the network.

7.8.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the BPS/PPS protection for the Ethernet boards.

Figure 7-8 shows the configuration of the BPS protection for the EMS4 board and theconfiguration of the PPS protection for the EGS4 board. In the case of the EMS4, the slot forthe protection board is slot 7, and the slot for the working board is slot 6. In the case of the EGS4,the slot for the protection board is slot 13, and the slot for the working board is slot 12.

Figure 7-8 Configuration of the BPS and PPS protection schemes for the EMS4 and EGS4boards

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

EMS4

(W)

EMS4

(P)

EGS4

(W)

EGS4

(P)

ETF8

ETF8

ETF8

ETF8

P: Protection board W: Working board

7.9 Planning the 1+1 Protection for the ATM BoardsWhen planning the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, consider the capabilities of supportingthe 1+1 protection and planning principles.

7.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Protection for the ATM BoardsWhen planning the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, consider the capabilities of supportingthe 1+1 protection.

7.9.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planing the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, follow the basic principles.

7.9.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards.

7.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Protection for the ATMBoards

When planning the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, consider the capabilities of supportingthe 1+1 protection.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-13

Page 148: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 all support the 1+1 protection.

7.9.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen planing the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, follow the basic principles.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of theservices.

l When configuring the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, choose the N1IDL4, N1IDQ1as the processing board.

l When using the 1+1 protection, the protection and working boards should be inserted intopaired slots.

7.9.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards.

Figure 7-9 shows the configuration of the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards. The IDL4 boardshoused in slots 3 and 16 serve as a mutual backup for each other. The IDQ1 boards housed inslots 7 and 12 serve as a mutual backup for each other. The IDQ1 boards housed in slots 8 and11 serve as a mutual backup for each other.

Figure 7-9 Configuration of the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards

P: Protection board W: Working board

Fiber Routing

SLOT

9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT

8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT

4

SLOT

3

SLOT

2

SLOT

1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

SLOT

5

SLOT

6

SLOT

7

IDL4

(P)

IDQ

1(P)

IDL4

(W)

IDQ

1(W

)

7.10 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN ServiceThe DDN is a type of low-rate data service. The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the TPS for the DDNservices.

7.10.1 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN ServiceFor the OptiX OSN 2500, when planning the TPS protection for the DDN service, first considerthe capabilities of supporting the TPS protection for the DDN service.

7.10.2 Planning Principles

7 Planning Equipment-Level ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 149: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

To rationally and effectively plan the TPS protection for the DDN service, the basic planningprinciples should be followed.

7.10.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the DDN service.

7.10.1 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN ServiceFor the OptiX OSN 2500, when planning the TPS protection for the DDN service, first considerthe capabilities of supporting the TPS protection for the DDN service.

The N1DX1 board for the OptiX OSN 2500 supports one 1:N (N≤4) TPS protection group.

7.10.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the TPS protection for the DDN service, the basic planningprinciples should be followed.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of theservices.

l When configuring the TPS protection for the DDN service, choose the N1DX1 as theprocessing board, and N1DM12 as the interface board.

l The slot for the protection board is slot 5. The slots for the working boards are slots 6 -7,and 12 - 13.

7.10.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the DDN service.

Figure 7-10 shows the configuration of a 1:4 TPS protection group for the DDN service.

Figure 7-10 TPS configuration for the DDN service

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

DM

12

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

DX1

(P)

DX1

(W)

DX1

(W)

DX1

(W)

DX1

(W)

DM

12D

M12

DM

12

DM

12

DM

12D

M12

DM

12

P: Protection board W: Working board

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-15

Page 150: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

7.11 Planning the TPS Protection for the Hybrid ServiceThrough rational planning, the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the coexistence of TPS protectiongroups for different services, and thus the protection is effective.

7.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the Hybrid ServiceFor the OpitX OSN 2500, when planning the TPS protection for the hybrid service, first considerthe capabilities of supporting the TPS protection.

7.11.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the TPS protection for the hybrid service, the planningprinciples should be followed.

7.11.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the hybrid service.

7.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the HybridService

For the OpitX OSN 2500, when planning the TPS protection for the hybrid service, first considerthe capabilities of supporting the TPS protection.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the configuration of the TPS protection for the hybrid service.When the slots meet the requirements, the TPS protection groups can coexist in any two of theservice types, such as E1/T1, E3/T3, E4, STM-1, Ethernet, or DDN.

7.11.2 Planning PrinciplesTo rationally and effectively plan the TPS protection for the hybrid service, the planningprinciples should be followed.

l Determine which service board should be configured with the TPS protection firstaccording to the importance of the services.

l Determine which board slot should be used according to the principles for planning theservices.

7.11.3 Planning CasesA case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the hybrid service.

Figure 7-11 shows an example when two different types of TPS protection groups coexist.

l In the case of the E1/T1 service, the slot for the protection board is slot 5, and the slots forthe working boards are slots 6, and 7.

l In the case of the STM-1 (electrical signal) service, the slot for the protection board is slot13, and the slot for the working board is slot 12.

7 Planning Equipment-Level ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

7-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 151: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 7-11 TPS configuration for the hybrid service

Fiber routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

SEP

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(P)

SEP

(P)

EU04

D12

S/D

75S

D12

S/D

75S

D12

S/D

75S

D12

S/D

75S

TSB

8

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

P: Protection board W: Working board

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-17

Page 152: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05
Page 153: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

8 Planning Clocks

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple clock modes, and provides the clock protectionswitching in multiple ways. When planning the clocks, follow the basic principles and choosedifferent clock configuration for different network types.

8.1 Basic PrinciplesWhen planning the clocks in the network, follow the basic principles.

8.2 Capabilities of Supporting ClocksThe clocks supported by the equipment and the clock protection are defined.

8.3 Planning ExamplesExamples are given to show how to configure clocks in the chain, tangent ring, and intersectingring networks.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 8 Planning Clocks

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

Page 154: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

8.1 Basic PrinciplesWhen planning the clocks in the network, follow the basic principles.

l At the backbone and convergence layers, use the clock protection and configure the activeand standby reference clock sources to perform the clock switching. At the access layer, innormal situations, configure one reference clock source at the central station. Clocks atother stations follow the clock at the central station.

l Central nodes or nodes with high reliability can provide clock sources.

l When the building integrated timing supply system (BITS) or other external clockequipment with high precision is provided, the NE should use the external timing mode.When no BITS or other external clock equipment with high precision is provided, the NEshould use the line timing mode. The internal timing mode should be used as the lowestclock tracing level.

l Properly plan the clock synchronization network to avoid interlocked clocks and clockloops.

l The shortest route requirements for the line clock tracing are as follows:

– In the case of the ring network composed of less than six NEs, the reference clock sourceis traced in one direction.

– In the case of the ring network composed of six or more than six NEs, the line clocktracing should follow the shortest route. Thus, in the case of the network composed ofN NEs, N/2 NEs trace the reference clock source in one direction and the other N/2 NEstrace the reference clock source in another direction.

l When multiple clocks form a long chain, clock compensation is required. In this case, thenumber of the G.812 secondary clocks on the transmission link should not exceed 10. Thenumber of the G.813 clocks between two G.812 secondary clocks should not exceed 20.The number of G.813 clocks between the G.811 clock and the G.812 clock should notexceed 20. The number of G.813 clocks should not exceed 60.

l When the synchronization status message (SSM) is not enabled, do not configure the clocksinto a loop on the local NE.

l The attenuation of the received SSM should be within a specific range. If the attenuationis out of the range, the SSM cannot be received.

l Use the clock extracted from STM-N signals as the inter-office clock. Do not use thetributary signal timing.

8.2 Capabilities of Supporting ClocksThe clocks supported by the equipment and the clock protection are defined.

Basic Functions

OptiX OSN 2500 have the following functions:

l Tracing of the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source and internalclock source.

l Non-SSM, standard SSM and extended SSM.

8 Planning ClocksOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 155: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Clock working modes compliant with ITU-T G.781, such as locked, hold-over, and freerun.

l Output of the line clock, tributary clock and external clock.

l Tributray re-timing.

l ASON clock tracing scheme.

Clock ProtectionOptiX OSN 2500 can realize the clock protection switching in the following ways:

l Do not enable the SSM, and then perform the clock source selection and switchingaccording to the priority list. In this case, do not configure two clocks in two directions onone NE into the priority list. Otherwise, the clocks form a loop.

l Enable the standard SSM mode, and then configure the priority list to ensure that the OptiXOSN 2500 can automatically select the clock source with the highest priority to avoid thelocked loop.

l Enable the extended SSM mode. Use the fifth to eighth bits of the S1 byte to define thequality of the clock source, and use the first to fourth bits of the S1 byte to define the clocksource ID. Thus, the clock loop can be avoided. The principles for setting the clock IDs areas follows:– All external BITSs should be assigned with clock IDs.

– In the case of nodes with external BITSs, the internal clocks of these nodes should beassigned with clock IDs.

– In the case of nodes that access the chain or ring network to another ring network, theclock sources of these nodes should be assigned with clock IDs.

– In the case of nodes that access the chain or ring network to another ring network, whenthe clock tracing level includes the line clock source, the line clock sources accessed toanother ring network should be assigned with clock IDs.

8.3 Planning ExamplesExamples are given to show how to configure clocks in the chain, tangent ring, and intersectingring networks.

Configure Clocks in the Chain NetworkWhen the SSM is enabled, clocks are not interlocked in the chain network. When there are morethan 20 nodes, add the BITS clocks for compensation. See Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1 Configuration of clocks in the chain network

Node 1 Node 21Node 2 Node N. . . . . .

BITS CompensationBITS

Clock tracing

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 8 Planning Clocks

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

Page 156: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Configure Clocks in the Tangent Ring NetworkIn the case of the tangent rings, configure a BITS clock at the tangent node as the reference clocksource of the network. See Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2 Configuration of clocks in the tangent rings network

BITS

Clock tracing

Configure Clocks in the Intersecting Ring NetworkIn the case of the intersecting rings, configure an active BITS clock at one of the junction nodesas the reference clock source of the network. Configure a standby BITS clock at another junctionnode to perform the clock active/standby switching. See Figure 8-3.

Figure 8-3 Configuration of clocks in the intersecting rings network

BITS

StandbyBITS

Clock tracing

8 Planning ClocksOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 157: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

About This Chapter

The planning of orderwire and auxiliary interfaces is defined, and a planning example is given.

9.1 Planning Orderwire Phone InterfacesThe capabilities of supporting orderwire phone interfaces are defined, and the process ofplanning the orderwire phone interface is defined according to the planning principles.

9.2 Planning Broadcast Data Interfaces S1–S4The broadcast data interfaces are S1–S4.

9.3 Planning External Alarm InterfacesThe planning of the external alarm interfaces is defined.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

Page 158: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

9.1 Planning Orderwire Phone InterfacesThe capabilities of supporting orderwire phone interfaces are defined, and the process ofplanning the orderwire phone interface is defined according to the planning principles.

9.1.1 Capability of Supporting Orderwire Phone InterfacesThe capability of supporting orderwire phone interfaces is defined.

9.1.2 Planning PrinciplesThe principles for planning the orderwire phone interfaces are defined.

9.1.3 Planning ExampleAn example is given to show how to plan the orderwire phone interfaces.

9.1.1 Capability of Supporting Orderwire Phone InterfacesThe capability of supporting orderwire phone interfaces is defined.

The Q1SEI board of the OptiX OSN 2500 provides one orderwire phone interface, two NNIvoice interfaces and two NNI signaling interfaces. The five interfaces are all of the RJ-45 type.

9.1.2 Planning PrinciplesThe principles for planning the orderwire phone interfaces are defined.

Adhere to the following principles when planning orderwire phone interfaces:

l Make sure that the orderwire signaling is compatible in the entire network.

l Make sure the orderwire phone number of each node is of the same length. It isrecommended that the orderwire phone number be set as four characters.

l Set the orderwire phone number in the format: subnet number (one character) + user number(three characters).

l Make sure that the conference phone numbers in the entire network are the same and thenumber should be larger than the orderwire phone number. It is recommended that theconference phone number be set to 9999.

l Make sure that all orderwire phone numbers in the entire network, except the conferencephone number, are unique.

l Make sure that the dial-up scheme of the orderwire phone of each node is dual-tone multi-frequency.

l Make sure the call waiting time of each node is the same. If less than 30 nodes are presentin the network, set the call waiting time to 5s. If more than 30 nodes are present in thenetwork, set the call waiting time to 9s.

l The orderwire phone number should increase as the node ID increases.

l Consider the possibility of howl in the orderwire loop. Release the loop to solve the problemof howl in the conference phone. The loop is automatically released, if an OptiX OSN 2500system is networked with other OptiX OSN 2500 systems, or with the OptiX OSN 7500,OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 3500T, OptiX OSN 2500REG and the OptiX OSN 1500. Ifthe OptiX OSN 2500 is networked with other equipment, manually release the loop.

l If no optical path is available between two nodes, which, however, require orderwirecommunication, use the orderwire NNI connection for the orderwire communication. Use

9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary InterfacesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 159: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Voice 1 or Voice 2 as the voice interface, and Serial 3 or Serial 4 as the data interface forthe orderwire NNI connection.

9.1.3 Planning ExampleAn example is given to show how to plan the orderwire phone interfaces.

Figure 9-1 shows how to plan the orderwire phone interfaces.

Set the orderwire phone number as four characters, with the last two characters being the sameas the node ID. The conference phone number has four characters and is 9999.

Figure 9-1 Planning the orderwire phone interfaces

Ring 1

Ring 2

Ring 3 Ring 4

Ring 5

Node 01Phone: 1001

Node 02Phone: 1002

Node 04Phone: 1004

Node 03Phone: 1003Node 20

Phone: 1020

Node 21Phone: 1021

Node 31Phone: 1031

Node 32Phone: 1032

Node 41Phone: 1041

Node 43Phone: 1043

Node 53Phone: 1053

Node 54Phone: 1054

Meeting number: 9999

9.2 Planning Broadcast Data Interfaces S1–S4The broadcast data interfaces are S1–S4.

9.2.1 Capability of Supporting Broadcast Data InterfacesThe capability of supporting broadcast data interfaces is defined.

9.2.2 Planning PrinciplesThe principles for planning the broadcast data interfaces are defined.

9.2.3 Planning ExampleAn example is given to show how to plan the data broadcast interface.

9.2.1 Capability of Supporting Broadcast Data InterfacesThe capability of supporting broadcast data interfaces is defined.

The broadcast data interfaces can be used for universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter(UART) full-duplex communication.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

Page 160: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

The Q1SEI board of the OptiX OSN 2500 provides four broadcast data interfaces S1–S4, whichare of the RJ-45 type.

The S1–S4 interfaces must provide two level interfaces, RS-232 and RS-422. The RS-232interface complies with the ITU-T V.24/V.28 Recommendations for interfaces. The RS-422interface complies with the ITU-T V.11 Recommendations for interfaces.

The data is transparently transmitted by the broadcast data interface. No interface rate andtransmission control protocol needs to be specified. The interface rate is no more than 19.2 kbit/s.

The broadcast data interfaces S1–S4 can be connected to the data terminal equipment. The dataof the data terminal equipment can then be transmitted in the SDH network in a point-to-pointor point-to-multipoint manner. In this way, data can be broadcast to several optical interfaces.

9.2.2 Planning PrinciplesThe principles for planning the broadcast data interfaces are defined.

Adhere to the following principles when planning broadcast data interfaces:

l The configured broadcast data interfaces should not form a loop.

l Do not configure the unused optical interfaces into the broadcast domain for the broadcastinterface.

l Do not configure the NE where the broadcast interface is not used, into the broadcastdomain.

l Make sure the data flows in the same direction as the clock tracing.

If the equipment at the opposite end uses the RS-232 interface to connect to the broadcast datainterface of the OptiX OSN 2500, this equipment should meet the following requirements:

l The interface is of the RS-232 level.

l The maximum rate should not exceed 19.2 kbit/s.

l The interface should be of the RS-232 high level (–9 V).

l Use the software to ensure that only one slave node can transmit data to the master node atany time.

l The cables should not be longer than 15 m.

If the equipment at the opposite end uses the RS-422 interface to connect to the broadcast datainterface of the OptiX OSN 2500, this equipment should meet the following requirements:

l The interface is of the RS-422 level.

l The maximum rate should not exceed 19.2 kbit/s.

l Use the software to ensure that only one slave node can transmit data to the master node atany time.

l The cables should not be longer than 1 km.

9.2.3 Planning ExampleAn example is given to show how to plan the data broadcast interface.

9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary InterfacesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

9-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 161: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Service RequirementAs shown in Figure 9-2, NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 are equipped with environment monitors, andNE 1 is equipped with a monitoring computer (master node). The monitoring computer needsto communicate with the environment monitor (slave node) of NE 2–NE 4 through the OptiXOSN 2500. The monitoring computer broadcasts commands to the environment monitors of NE2–NE 4. The environment monitors of NE 2–NE 4 report the collected data to the monitoringcomputer.

Application SchemeFigure 9-2 shows an application scheme.

Figure 9-2 Application of the broadcast data interfaces

Two-fiberbidirectional

MSP ring

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

OptiX OSN 2500

Data flow

Monitoringcomputer

Environmentmonitor

Environmentmonitor

Environmentmonitor

NE 1–NE 4 all use the broadcast data interface S1 to connect to the monitoring computer orenvironment monitor, and use optical interface boards to transmit data to the SDH network.

NE 1 connects the monitoring computer through the S1 interface. NE 1 then transmits the datathat is received by the S1 interface to the west and east NEs. In the converse direction, the westand east NEs transmit data to NE 1, which then transmits the data through the S1 interface. Inthis way, at any time, only one environment monitor can transmit data.

9.3 Planning External Alarm InterfacesThe planning of the external alarm interfaces is defined.

9.3.1 Capability of Supporting External Alarm InterfacesThe capability of supporting external alarm interfaces is defined.

9.3.2 Planning PrinciplesThe principles for planning the external alarm interfaces are defined.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5

Page 162: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

9.3.1 Capability of Supporting External Alarm InterfacesThe capability of supporting external alarm interfaces is defined.

The SEI board of the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the following external alarm interfaces:

l Eight alarm input interfaces, which are used to access the alarm signals from externalequipment.

l Four alarm output interfaces, which are used to output the alarm signals of the local NE.

l Four alarm concatenation interfaces, which are used to concatenate the alarm signals ofseveral NEs.

Use RJ-45 connectors for the external alarm interfaces.

9.3.2 Planning PrinciplesThe principles for planning the external alarm interfaces are defined.

The external alarm input interfaces are used for monitoring the environment of the equipmentroom. The alarm signals are transmitted to the T2000 or a central alarm monitoring equipmentthrough these interfaces.

Generally, the external alarm output interfaces are used to transmit the alarm signals of NEs tothe central alarm monitor equipment.

On the T2000, you can set the alarm trigger mode for each alarm to Enabled or Disabled. Ineither mode, alarms are reported.

9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary InterfacesOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

9-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 163: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

10 Planning Hardware

About This Chapter

The planning for the cabinet, slots, and interfaces is defined.

10.1 Planning the CabinetThe appearance and specifications of the cabinet, and the principles for planning the cabinet aredefined.

10.2 Planning Slots for BoardsThe slot layout in the subrack, the mapping relation between the board and slot, and the principlesfor the slots are defined.

10.3 Planning Interface BoardsThe interfaces for each board and the principles for planning the interfaces are defined.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-1

Page 164: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

10.1 Planning the CabinetThe appearance and specifications of the cabinet, and the principles for planning the cabinet aredefined.

10.1.1 CabinetThe OptiX OSN 2500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet or a 19-inch standard cabinet.

10.1.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen choosing a cabinet, consider the internal height of the equipment room, height of thecombined cabinet, and subrack quantity.

10.1.1 CabinetThe OptiX OSN 2500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet or a 19-inch standard cabinet.

Figure 10-1 shows an ETSI cabinet that is 300 mm deep.

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 165: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 10-1 Appearance of the ETSI cabinet

W

H

D

Table 10-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.

Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Allowed SubrackQuantity

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 55 2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 79 2

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 60 3

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 84 3

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-3

Page 166: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Allowed SubrackQuantity

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 70 4

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) 94 4

NOTEAll dimensions are in mm. The following figure shows the directions of the width, the depth and the height.

W

H

D

Table 10-2 lists the technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets.

Table 10-2 Technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 90

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 110

10.1.2 Planning PrinciplesWhen choosing a cabinet, consider the internal height of the equipment room, height of thecombined cabinet, and subrack quantity.

Consider the following factors when you choose a cabinet for the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack:

l Internal height of the equipment room

l Height of the combined cabinet

l Subrack quantity

10.2 Planning Slots for BoardsThe slot layout in the subrack, the mapping relation between the board and slot, and the principlesfor the slots are defined.

10.2.1 Slot AllocationThe OptiX OSN 2500 subrack has only one layer. The left portion and right portion of thesubrack, where eight slots are present, are slot areas for interface boards. The middle portion ofthe subrack, where ten slots are present, is the slot area for processing boards.

10.2.2 Planning PrinciplesThe basic principles for planning the slots and the slots supported by the equipment are defined.

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 167: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

10.2.1 Slot AllocationThe OptiX OSN 2500 subrack has only one layer. The left portion and right portion of thesubrack, where eight slots are present, are slot areas for interface boards. The middle portion ofthe subrack, where ten slots are present, is the slot area for processing boards.

Figure 10-2 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack.

Figure 10-3 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Slots 5–7 in the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack can be divided into half-height slots.

Figure 10-2 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (before the division of slots)

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16/4

/1

CXL

16/4

/1

inte

rface

boa

rd

SAP

proc

essi

ng b

oard

inte

rface

boa

rdin

terfa

ce b

oard

inte

rface

boa

rd

inte

rface

boa

rd

inte

rface

boa

rd

inte

rface

boa

rd

inte

rface

boa

rd

proc

essi

ng b

oard

proc

essi

ng b

oard

proc

essi

ng b

oard

proc

essi

ng b

oard

proc

essi

ng b

oard

proc

essi

ng b

oard

Figure 10-3 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (before the division of slots)

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIUSLOT22

PIUSLOT23

FANSLOT25

FANSLOT24

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

622M

bit/s

622M

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

CXL

16/4

/1

CXL

16/4

/1

SAP

Figure 10-4 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack after the division of slots.Figure 10-5 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 after the division of slots.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-5

Page 168: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Figure 10-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (after the division of slots)

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT

5

SLOT

6

SLOT

7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16/4

/1

CXL

16/4

/1

SAP

SLOT

19

SLOT

20

SLOT

21in

terfa

ce b

oard

proc

essi

ng b

oard

inte

rface

boa

rdin

terfa

ce b

oard

inte

rface

boa

rd

inte

rface

boa

rd

inte

rface

boa

rdin

terfa

ce b

oard

inte

rface

boa

rd

proc

essi

ng b

oard

proc

essi

ng b

oard

proc

essi

ng b

oard

Figure 10-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (after the division of slots)

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

CXL16/4/1

SLOT10

CXL

16/4/1

SLOT13

SLOT14

SAP

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIUSLOT22

PIUSLOT23

FANSLOT25

FANSLOT24

2.5G

bit/s

SLOT19

SLOT5

SLOT20

SLOT6

SLOT21

SLOT7

Slot Area for Interface Boards

Slots for interface boards: slots 1–4 and 15–18

Slot Area for Processing Boardsl Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 5–8 and 11–13

l Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 5–8, 11–13, and 19–21

l Slots for integrated boards of the SCC, cross-connect and line units: slots 9–10

l Slot for the system auxiliary processing board: slot 14

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 169: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Other slotsl SEI auxiliary interface board: slot area for auxiliary interface boards

l Slots for PIU boards: slots 22–33

l Slots for fan boards: slots 24–25

Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for ProcessingBoards

Table 10-3 lists the mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processingboards.

Table 10-3 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boardsfor the OptiX OSN 2500

Slots forProcessing Boards

Slots for InterfaceBoards

Slots forProcessing Boards

Slots for InterfaceBoards

Slot 6 Slots 1 and 2 Slot 7 Slots 3 and 4

Slot 12 Slots 15 and 16 Slot 13 Slots 17 and 18

Slot 6 (half-heightslot)

Slot 2 Slot 20 (half-heightslot)

Slot 1

Slot 7 (half-heightslot)

Slot 4 Slot 21 (half-heightslot)

Slot 3

Boards and Their Valid SlotsTable 10-4 lists the boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 10-4 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 2500

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SL16A, N1SL16,N2SL16A, N2SL16,N3SL16A, N3SL16

1 x STM-16 optical interfaceboard

Slots 7–8 and 11–12

N1SF16 1 x STM-16 optical interfaceboard (with FEC)

Slots 7–8 and 11–12

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-7

Page 170: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 7–8 and 11–12 (forthe board housed in any ofslots 7–8 and 11–12, fouroptical interfaces can beconfigured), slots 5–6 (forthe board housed in any ofslots 5–6, one opticalinterface can beconfigured), and slot 13(for the board housed in anyof slot 13, two opticalinterfaces can beconfigured)

N1SLD4, N2SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 7–8 and 11–13 (forthe board housed in any ofslots 7–8 and 11–13, twooptical interfaces can beconfigured), and slots 5–6(for the board housed in anyof slots 5–6, one opticalinterface can beconfigured)

N1SL4, N2SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N2SLO1 8 x AU-3 high density accessboard

Slots 5–6 (for the boardhoused in any of slots 5–6,four optical interfaces canbe configured)Slots 7–8 and 11–13 (forthe board housed in any ofslots 7–8 and 11–13, 1–8optical interfaces can beconfigured)

N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1SL1, N2SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 171: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interfaceboard

Slots 5–6 (for the boardhoused in any of slots 5–6,1–4 optical interfaces canbe configured), slots 7–8and 11–12 (for the boardhoused in any of slots 7–8and 11–12, 1–12 opticalinterfaces can beconfigured), and slot 13(for the board housed in anyof slot 13, 1–8 opticalinterfaces can beconfigured)

R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board(half-height)

Slots 5–7 and 19–21

R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board(half-height)

Slots 7 and 21 (for theboard housed in any of slots7 and 21, two opticalinterfaces can beconfigured after thedivision of slots), and slots5–6 and 19–20 (for theboard housed in any of slots5–6 and 19–20, one opticalinterface can be configuredafter the division of slots)

R1SLQ1 4 x STM-4 optical interface board(half-height)

Slots 5–7 and 19–21

R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board(half-height)

Slots 5–7 and 19–21

N1SEP (interfacesavailable on the interfaceboard)a

8 x STM-1 processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13

N1SEP1 (interfacesavailable on the frontpanel)a

2 x STM-1 processing board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13

N1PD3, N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13

N1PL3, N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13

N1PL3A, N2PL3A(without the interfaceboard)

3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-9

Page 172: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1PQ1 (A/B) 63 x E1 75-ohm or 12-ohmprocessing board

Slots 5–7 and 12–13

N2PQ1 63 x E1/T1 hybrid processingboard

Slots 5–7 and 12–13

N2PQ3 12 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13

N1PQM 63 x E1/T1 processing board Slots 5–7 and 12–13

N1DXA DDN service convergence board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1DX1 DDN service access andconvergence board

Slots 5–7 and 12–13

N1DM12 DDN service access board Slots 1–4 and 15–18

R1PD1A/B 32 x E1 processing board (half-height)

Slots 5–7 and 19–21

R2PD1 32 x E1/T1 processing board Slots 5–7 and 19–21

R1EFT4 4 x FE Ethernet transparenttransmission board (half-height)

Slots 5–7 and 19–21

N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing boardwith Lanswitch

Slots 5–8 and 11–13 (622Mbit/s)

N2EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing boardwith Lanswitch

Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s), andslots 7–8, 11, and 13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N1EFS0 (with theinterface board)

8 x FE Ethernet processing boardwith Lanswitch

Slots 6–7 and 12–13 (622Mbit/s)

N2EFS0 (with theinterface board)

8 x FE Ethernet processing boardwith Lanswitch

Slots 7, and 12–13 (1.25Gbit/s), and slot 6 (622Mbit/s)

N4EFS0 8 x FE Ethernet processing boardwith Lanswitch

Slots 7, and 12–13 (1.25Gbit/s), and slot 6 (622Mbit/s)

N1EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing boardwith Lanswitch

Slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5Gbit/s)

N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing boardwith Lanswitch

Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparenttransmission board

Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25Gbit/s)

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 173: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processingboard

Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),slots 7–8, 11–12 (2.5 Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1EFT8 (interfacesavailable on the interfaceboard)

16 x FE Ethernet transparenttransmission board

Slots 7 and 12–13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N1EFT8 (interfacesavailable on the frontpanel)

8 x FE Ethernet transparenttransmission board

Slots 5–8 and 11–13 (622Mbit/s)

N1EFT8A 8 x FE Ethernet transparenttransmission board

Slots 5–8 and 11–13 (622Mbit/s)

N1EMR0, N2EMR0(interfaces available on theinterface board)

1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet ringprocessing board

Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s), slots 7and 12 (2.5 Gbit/s), and slot13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1EMR0, N2EMR0(interfaces available on thefront panel)

1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet ringprocessing board

Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N1EMS4 (interfacesavailable on the interfaceboard)

4 x GE and 16 x FE Ethernettransparent transmission andconvergence board

Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s), slots 7and 12 (2.5 Gbit/s), and slot13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1EMS4 (interfacesavailable on the frontpanel)

4 x GE Ethernet convergenceboard

Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet convergenceboard

Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N3EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet convergenceboard

Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processingboard

Slots 7–8 and 11–13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processingboard

Slots 7–8 and 11–13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processingboard

Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s), andslots 7–8, 11, and 13 (1.25Gbit/s)

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-11

Page 174: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processingboard

Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s), andslots 7–8, 11, and 13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N1MST4 4-port multiservice transparenttransmission board

Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1MR2A 2-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board (processingboard)

Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1MR2B 2-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board (half-height)

Slots 5–7 and 19–21

N1MR2C (with interfaceboard)

2-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board

Slots 1–4 and 15–18

TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board

Slots 5–8 and 11–13

TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board

Slots 5–8 and 11–13

TN11CMR2 2-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board

Slots 5–8 and 11–13

TN11CMR4 4-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board

Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate wavelengthconversion board

Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1BA2 2-channel optical boosteramplifier board

Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1BPA 1-channel amplifier and 1-channel preamplifier board

Slots 5–8 and 11–13

TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1EU08 8 x STM-1 (e) electrical interfaceboard

Slots 3, 15, and 17

N1OU08 (LC) 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 3, 15, and 17

N2OU08 (SC) 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 3, 15, and 17

N1EU04 4 x STM-1 (e) electrical interfaceboard

Slots 1, 3, 15 and 17

N1MU04 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical interfaceswitching board

Slots 1, 3, 15 and 17

N1C34S 3 x E3/T3 electrical interfaceswitching board

Slots 1, 3, 15 and 17

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 175: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1D34S 6 x E3/T3 electrical interfaceswitching board

Slots 1–4 and 15–18

N1D75S 32 x E1/T1 75-ohm electricalinterface switching board

Slots 1–4 and 15–18

N1D12S 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electricalinterface switching board

Slots 1–4 and 15–18

N1D12B 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electricalinterface board

Slots 1–4 and 15–18

N1ETF8b 8 x 100M Ethernet twisted pairinterface board

Slots 1–4 and 15–18

N1EFF8b 8 x 100M Ethernet opticalinterface board

Slots 1–4 and 15–18

N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twistedpair interface switching board

Slots 1, 3, 15, and 17

N1TSB8 8-channel electrical interfaceswitching board

Slots 1, 2, 17, and 18

N1TSB4 4-channel electrical interfaceswitching board

Slots 1 and 17

Q2CXL16c STM-16 integrated board of thecross-connect, timing and lineunits

Slots 9–10

Q2CXL4c STM-4 integrated board of theSCC, cross-connect and line units

Slots 9–10

Q2CXL1c STM-1 integrated board of theSCC, cross-connect and line units

Slots 9–10

Q1SAP, Q2SAP System auxiliary processing unit Slot 14

Q1PIU PIU board Slots 22–23

Q1SEI Auxiliary signal expandinginterface board

Slot area for SEI interfaces

N1FAN Fan board Slots 24–25

N1FIB Filter isolating board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1COA, 61COA,62COAd

Case-shaped optical amplifier Slots 101–102

CAUd Power monitoring board Slot 50

ROPd Single wavelength long-haulboard

Slot 103

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-13

Page 176: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Full Name Valid Slots

a: On the T2000, the SEP is displayed as the SEP or SEP1. When interfaces are available onthe front panel of the SEP, the SEP is displayed as the SEP1 on the T2000. When the SEP isused with the interface board, the SEP is displayed as the SEP on the T2000.b: The EMS4 is used with the N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.c: The CXL is an integrated board of the cross-connect, timing, SCC and line units for theOptiX OSN 2500. As one physical board in the subrack, the CXL is housed in any of slots 9and 10. On the T2000. the CXL is displayed as the CXL, SCC, and SL1/4/16, which arehoused in any of slots 80–81, 82–83, and 9–10 respectively.d: The corresponding slots are logical slots rather than physical slots.

10.2.2 Planning PrinciplesThe basic principles for planning the slots and the slots supported by the equipment are defined.

Adhere to the following principles when planning slots for different boards of the OptiX OSN2500:

l The integrated board should be inserted in slot 9.

l The SAP board should be inserted in slot 14.

l If an MSP ring is configured, the two boards that are involved in the same ring should behoused in paired slots.

l For configuration of the MSP or SNCP, if the working board is a line board that supportsthe TCM service or AU-3 service, the protection board should also be a line board thatsupports the TCM service or AU-3 service. Otherwise, services are interrupted in the caseof protection switching.

NOTE

When the TCM and AU-3 functions are enabled on the working board, the TCM and AU-3 functionson the protection board are not required.

l When the E1/T1 boards are configured with the TPS protection, slot 5 is for the protectionboard. For future expansion, reserve the slot and configure boards to the other slots.

l When the E3/T3/E4/STM-1 boards are configured with the TPS protection, slots 6 and 13are for the protection boards. For future expansion, reserve the two slots and configureboards to the other slots.

l Do not use different optical interfaces on the same board to form a network.

Follow the sequence listed in Table 10-5 to plan slots for boards.

Table 10-5 Sequence for planning slots for boards

SequenceNo.

Board Slots (Priority Decreases fromLeft to Right)

1 N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16,N1SL6A, N2SL6A, N3SL6A,N1SF16

Slots 8/11, 7/12

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 177: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

SequenceNo.

Board Slots (Priority Decreases fromLeft to Right)

2 N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4

3 N1SLT1, N2SLO1 Slots 8/11, 7/12, 13, 6, 5

4 N1SLD4, N2SLD4 Slots 8/11, 7/12, 13

5 R1PD1, R2PD1, R1SLQ1, R1SL1 Slots 5, 19, 6, 20, 7, 21 (half height)

6 N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1 Slots 7, 12, 6, 13 (uplink cablerouting)Slots 6, 13, 7, 12 (downlink cablerouting)

7 N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, N2PL3 Slots 7, 12, 6, 13

8 N1DX1

9 N1DXA Slots 8/11, 7/12, 6/13, 5

10 N2EFS0, N4EFS0 Slots 7, 12, 6, 13

11 N1EMR0, N2EMR0 Slots 7/12, 6/13 (with the interfaceboard)

Slots 8/11, 7/12, 6/13, 5 (without theinterface board)

12 N1EMS4

13 N1EFT8

14 N1EFT8A Slots 8/11, 7/12, 6/13, 5

15 R1EFT4 Slots 5, 19, 6, 20, 7, 21 (half height)

16 N1SEP1 Slots 7/12, 6/13 (with the interfaceboard)Slots 8/11, 7/12, 6/13, 5 (without theinterface board)

17 N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1,N1SL1, N2SL1

Slots 8/11, 7/12, 6/13, 5

18 N1EFS4, N2EFS4

19 N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N2EGS2

20 N1EGT2

21 N1MST4

22 N1PL3A, N2PL3A

23 N1ADQ1, N1ADL4, N1IDQ1,N1IDL4

24 N1BA2, N1BPA

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-15

Page 178: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

SequenceNo.

Board Slots (Priority Decreases fromLeft to Right)

25 N1LWX, N1MR2A, TN11MR2,TN11MR4, TN11CMR2,TN11CMR4, TN11OBU1

10.3 Planning Interface BoardsThe interfaces for each board and the principles for planning the interfaces are defined.

10.3.1 Planning Interface BoardsInterfaces supported by the equipment are interfaces of the SDH processing boards, PDHprocessing boards, and data processing boards.

10.3.2 Planning PrinciplesThe equipment supports optical interfaces at multiple rates. When planning the optical interfaces,follow the corresponding principles.

10.3.1 Planning Interface BoardsInterfaces supported by the equipment are interfaces of the SDH processing boards, PDHprocessing boards, and data processing boards.

Interfaces of SDH Processing Boards

Table 10-6 lists the interfaces of the SDH processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 10-6 Interfaces of SDH processing boards

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1SL16,N2SL16,N3SL16

Interfaces availableon the front panel

L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je LC

N1SL16A,N2SL16A,N3SL16A

Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC

N1SF16 Interfaces availableon the front panel

Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f LC

N1SLQ4 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N2SLQ4 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N1SLD4 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 179: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N2SLD4 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N1SL4 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N2SL4 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N1SLT1 Interfaces availableon the front panel

S-1.1 LC

N1SLQ1 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N2SLQ1 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N1SL1 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N2SL1 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

R1SLD4 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

R1SL4 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

R1SLQ1 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

R1SL1 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N1SEP1a Interfaces availableon the front panel

75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface SMB

N1SEPb 4 x STM-1 lineprocessing board:N1EU04

75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface SMB

8 x STM-1 lineprocessing board:N1OU08

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 LC

8 x STM-1 lineprocessing board:N2OU08

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 SC

8 x STM-1 lineprocessing board:N1EU08

75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface SMB

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-17

Page 180: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N2SLO1 Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

Q2CXL16c Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, Ve-16.2 LC

Q2CXL4c Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

Q2CXL1c Interfaces availableon the front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are the boards of the same type. When they are used with theinterface board, they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. When they provide interfaceson the front panel, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.b: The N1SEP can be used with the N1TSB8 or the N1TSB4 board to realize the TPSprotection.c: The Q2CXL is a board that integrates the line, SCC, cross-connect, and timing units forthe OptiX OSN 2500. It is housed in slot 9 and slot 10. On the T2000, it is displayed as threeboard types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively seated in the logical slots 80–81, 82–83and 9–10.

Interfaces of PDH Processing Boards

Table 10-7 lists the interfaces of the PDH processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 10-7 Interfaces of PDH processing boards

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1SPQ4 Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1MU04

75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface SMB

N2SPQ4 Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1MU04

75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface SMB

N1PD3 Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D34S

75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB

N1PL3 Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1C34S

75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB

N1PL3A Interfaces available onthe front panel

75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface

SMB

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 181: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N2PQ3 Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D34S

75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB

N2PD3 Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D34S

75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB

N2PL3 Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1C34S

75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB

N2PL3A Interfaces available onthe front panel

75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB

N1PQ1A Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D75S

75-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1PQ1B Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D12B

120-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1PQM Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D12S

120-ohm E1 interface, 100-ohm T1interface

DB44

N2PQ1A Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D75S

75-ohm E1 interface DB44

N2PQ1B Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D12S

120-ohm E1 interface, 100-ohm T1interface

DB44

R1PD1A Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D75S

75-ohm E1 interface DB44

R1PD1B Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D12S

120-ohm E1 interface DB44

R2PD1A Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D75S

75-ohm E1 interface DB44

R2PD1B Interfaces available onthe interface board, usedwith N1D12S

120-ohm E1 interface, 100-ohm T1interface

DB44

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-19

Page 182: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Interfaces of Data Processing BoardsTable 10-8 lists the interfaces of the data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 10-8 Interfaces of data processing boards

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1EGS2 Interfaces available on thefront panel

1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC

N2EGS2 Interfaces available on thefront panel

1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC

N1EFS0 Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1ETF8

10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1EFF8

100BASE-FX LC

N2EFS0 Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1ETF8

10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1EFF8

100BASE-FX LC

N4EFS0 Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1ETF8

10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1EFF8

100BASE-FX LC

N1EFS4 Interfaces available on thefront panel

10/100Base-TX RJ-45

N2EFS4 Interfaces available on thefront panel

10/100Base-TX RJ-45

N1EGT2 Interfaces available on thefront panel

1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC

N1EFT8 Interfaces available on thefront panel

10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1ETF8

10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 183: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1EFF8

100BASE-FX LC

N1EFT8A

Interfaces available on thefront panel

10/100Base-TX RJ-45

R1EFT4 Interfaces available on thefront panel

10/100Base-TX RJ-45

N1EMS4 Interfaces available on thefront panel

1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC

Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1ETF8

10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1EFF8

100BASE-FX LC

N1EGS4,N3EGS4

Interfaces available on thefront panel

1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX LC

N2EMR0 Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1ETF8

10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on theinterface board, used withN1EFF8

100BASE-FX LC

Interfaces available on thefront panel

1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC

N2EGR2 Interfaces available on thefront panel

1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC

N1ADL4 Interfaces available on thefront panel

S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N1ADQ1 Interfaces available on thefront panel

Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N1IDL4 Interfaces available on thefront panel

S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N1IDQ1 Interfaces available on thefront panel

Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N1MST4 Interfaces available on thefront panel

- LC

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-21

Page 184: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Interfaces of DDN Processing BoardsTable 10-9 lists the interfaces of DDN processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 10-9 Interfaces of DDN processing boards

Board Full Name InterfacingMode

Interfacing Mode Connector

N1DX1 N x 64 kbit/sserviceaccess andconvergenceboard

Interfacesavailable onthe N x 64 kbit/s interfaceboard,N1DM12

RS232, RS449, EIA530,EIA530-A, V.35, V.24,X.21, Frame E1

DB28, DB44

N1DXA N x 64 kbit/sserviceconvergenceboard

- - -

Interfaces of WDM Processing BoardsTable 10-10 lists the interfaces of WDM processing boards.

Table 10-10 Interfaces of WDM processing boards

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type

N1MR2A Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

N1MR2C Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

N1LWX Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

TN11MR2 Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

TN11MR4 Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

TN11CMR2 Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

TN11CMR4 Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 185: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Interfaces of Optical Power Booster Amplifier and Dispersion Compensation Units

Table 10-11 lists the interfaces of the optical power booster amplifier and dispersioncompensation units.

Table 10-11 Interfaces of the optical power booster amplifier and dispersion compensation units

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type

BA2 Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

BPA Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

61COA Interfaces available on theinterface board

SC

N1COA Interfaces available on theinterface board

SC

62COA Interfaces available on theinterface board

SC, E2000

DCU Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

ROP Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

N1FIB Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC, E2000

TN11OBU1 Interfaces available on theinterface board

LC

Interfaces of Auxiliary Boards

Table 10-12 lists the interfaces of auxiliary boards.

Table 10-12 Interfaces of auxiliary boards

Board Full Name Interface Type

Q1PIU Power interface unit -

N1FAN Fan control board -

SEI Auxiliary signal extensioninterface board

RJ-45

Q1SAP System auxiliary processing unit RJ-45

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-23

Page 186: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

10.3.2 Planning PrinciplesThe equipment supports optical interfaces at multiple rates. When planning the optical interfaces,follow the corresponding principles.

Determine the interfaces for the OptiX OSN 2500 to connect other equipment according to theinterface type and connector type.

For details on the technical specifications of the interfaces, refer to Chapter 11 "TechnicalSpecifications" in the OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System ProductDescription.

Principles for Planning STM-16 Optical InterfacesAdhere to the principles listed in Table 10-13 when planning STM-16 optical interfaces.

Table 10-13 Principles for planning STM-16 optical interfaces

InterfaceType

Connector

Transmission Distance(km)

Principles

I-16 LC 0 to 2 The interface supports the short-distancenetworking and requires a 5 dB attenuator.

S-16.1 LC 2 to 25 The interface supports the short-distancenetworking. If the required transmissiondistance ranges from 2 km to 15 km, a 5 dBoptical attenuator is required.

L-16.1 LC 25 to 50 The interface supports the long-distancenetworking. If the required transmissiondistance ranges from 25 km to 35 km, a 5 dBoptical attenuator is required.

L-16.2 LC 50 to 80 The interface supports the long-distancenetworking. If the required transmissiondistance ranges from 50 km to 60 km, a 5 dBoptical attenuator is required.

L-16.2Je LC 80 to 105 The interface supports the long-distancetransmission.

V-16.2Je LC 105 to 145 The interface supports the ultra-distancenetworking.l One BA2 (17 dBm) is required if the

transmission distance ranges from 129.1 kmto 145 km.

l One BA2 (14 dBm) is required if thetransmission distance ranges from 105 km to129.1 km.

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 187: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

InterfaceType

Connector

Transmission Distance(km)

Principles

U-16.2Je LC 145 to 200 The interface supports the ultra-distancenetworking.If the G.652 fiber is used, thefollowing configuration is required for differenttransmission distance:l If the required transmission distance ranges

from 145 km to 163 km, use one BPA (14dBm), two tunable attenuators and one LC/LC flange.

l If the required transmission distance rangesfrom 163 km to 174 km, use one BPA (17dBm), two tunable attenuators and one LC/LC flange.

l If the required transmission distance rangesfrom 192 km to 200 km, use one BPA (17dBm), one Roman 62COA, two tunableattenuators and one LC/LC flange.

U-16.2c LC 174 to 181 When the G.652 fiber is used, use one BPA (14dBm), one FEC, two tunable attenuators and oneLC/LC flange.

U-16.2d LC 181 to 192 When the G.652 fiber is used, use one BPA (17dBm), one FEC, two tunable attenuators and oneLC/LC flange.

U-16.2f LC 192 to 210 When the G.652 fiber is used, use one BPA (17dBm), one FEC, two tunable attenuators, oneRoman 62COA and one LC/LC flange.

Principles for Planning STM-4 Optical Interfaces

Adhere to the principles listed in Table 10-14 when planning STM-4 optical interfaces.

Table 10-14 Principles for Planning STM-4 Optical Interfaces

InterfaceType

Connector

Transmission Distance(km)

Principles

I-4 LC 0 to 2 The interface supports the short-distancenetworking and requires a 5 dB attenuator.

S-4.1 LC 2 to 20 If the required transmission distance rangesfrom 2 km to 15 km, use a 5 dB attenuator.

L-4.1 LC 20 to 50 If the required transmission distance rangesfrom 20 km to 40 km, use a 5 dB attenuator.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-25

Page 188: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

InterfaceType

Connector

Transmission Distance(km)

Principles

L-4.2 LC 50 to 80 The interface supports long-distancenetworking and requires a 5 dB attenuator if thetransmission distance ranges from 50 km to 60km.

Ve-4.2 LC 80 to 100 The interface supports the ultra-distancenetworking.

Principles for Planning STM-1 Optical InterfacesAdhere to the principles listed in Table 10-15 when planning STM-1 optical interfaces.

Table 10-15 Principles for Planning STM-1 Optical Interfaces

InterfaceType

Connector

Transmission Distance(km)

Principles

I-1 LC 0 to 2 The interface supports the short-distancenetworking and requires a 5 dB attenuator.

S-1.1 LC 2 to 20 The interface supports the short-distancenetworking. If the required transmissiondistance ranges from 2 km to 15 km, a 5 dBoptical attenuator is required.

L-1.1 LC 20 to 60 The interface supports medium-distancenetworking. If the transmission distance rangesfrom 20 km to 40 km, a 5 dB optical attenuatoris required.

L-1.2 LC 60 to 80 The interface supports long-distancenetworking. If the transmission distance rangesfrom 60 km to 80 km, a 5 dB optical attenuatoris required.

Ve-1.2 LC 80 to 100 The interface supports the ultra-distancetransmission.

10 Planning HardwareOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

10-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 189: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

11 Planning Environment for Operation

About This Chapter

The power consumption of the equipment, environment for operation, and planning principlesare defined.

11.1 Power Consumption of the EquipmentThe power consumption of the equipment should be considered when planning the operatingenvironment for the equipment.

11.2 Environment for OperationThe OptiX OSN 2500 requires proper climate for operating.

11.3 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the environment for the equipment, follow the basic principles.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 11 Planning Environment for Operation

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-1

Page 190: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

11.1 Power Consumption of the EquipmentThe power consumption of the equipment should be considered when planning the operatingenvironment for the equipment.

Table 11-1 lists the power supply parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 11-1 Power supply specifications

Item Specification

Power supply mode DC power supply

Nominal voltage –48 V or –60 V

Voltage range –38.4 V to –57.6 V or –48 V to –72 V

Max. power consumption 400 W/643 Wa

Max. current 10 A/16.8 Ab

a: This value indicates the maximum power consumption for the enhanced subrack.b: This value indicates the maximum current for the enhanced subrack.

For details on the power consumption of each board, refer to the OptiX OSN 2500 IntelligentOptical Transmission System Product Description.

11.2 Environment for OperationThe OptiX OSN 2500 requires proper climate for operating.

Climate

Table 11-2 and Table 11-3 list the climate requirements for operation of the OptiX OSN2500.

Table 11-2 Requirements for temperature and humidity

Temperature Relative Humidity

Long-termoperation

Short-term operation Long-termoperation

Short-term operation

0℃ to 45℃ –5℃ to 55℃ 10% to 90% 5% to 95%

NOTEThe temperature and humidity values are tested in the place 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front ofthe equipment. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does notexceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.

11 Planning Environment for OperationOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

11-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 191: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Table 11-3 Other climate requirements

Item Range

Altitude ≤ 4000 m

Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Temperature change rate ≤ 30℃/h

Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s2

Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2

Air flowing speed ≤ 5 m/s

Biological Environmentl Avoid multiplication of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.

l Keep rodents such as mice away.

Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive

dust.l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined

by Table 11-4.

Table 11-4 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance

Mechanical ActiveSubstance

Content

Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particles/m3

Suspending dust ≤ 0.2 mg/m3

Precipitable dust ≤ 1.5 mg/m2·h

Gravel ≤ 20 mg/m3

l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined byTable 11-5.

Table 11-5 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation

Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3

H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 11 Planning Environment for Operation

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-3

Page 192: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Chemical Active Substance Content

NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3

Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3

O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

NOX ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress

Table 11-6 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation.

Table 11-6 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation

Item Sub-Item Range

Sinusoidalvibration

Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -

Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s2

Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz

Impact Impact responsespectrum II

Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times oneach surface

Static load 0 kPa

NOTEImpact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by equipment that isspurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from upside, which the equipment with packagecan endure when the equipment is piled up in a specific manner.

11.3 Planning PrinciplesWhen planning the environment for the equipment, follow the basic principles.

Proper environment is required for the OptiX OSN 2500 to operate safely. Consider the followingitems when planning the operating environment for the OptiX OSN 2500.

l Location of the equipment room

l Architecture of the equipment room

l Cleanness of the equipment room

l Humidity and temperature requirements for the equipment

l ESD protection

11 Planning Environment for OperationOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

11-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 193: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Lightning protection grounding

l Power supply of the equipment

l Fire-fighting measures

For details, refer to Appendix A "Environment Requirements for Operation of the Equipment"in the OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Guide.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 11 Planning Environment for Operation

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-5

Page 194: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05
Page 195: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

12 Overview of Network Optimization

About This Chapter

As the scale of a network increases, more services are provides and the network becomes morecomplex. As a result, the network should be optimized according to specific principles.

12.1 Purpose of Network OptimizationThe network optimization can improve the usage of network resources, safety, and stability ofthe network, and increase the efficiency in network maintenance.

12.2 Principles for Optimizing the NetworkWhen optimizing the network, follow the basic principles.

12.3 Process for Optimizing a NetworkThe process for optimizing a network includes preparing the optimization, evaluating thenetwork, providing and analyzing network optimization schemes, and performing the networkoptimization.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 12 Overview of Network Optimization

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-1

Page 196: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

12.1 Purpose of Network OptimizationThe network optimization can improve the usage of network resources, safety, and stability ofthe network, and increase the efficiency in network maintenance.

As the scale of a network increases, more services are provided and the network becomes morecomplex. As a result, the engineering construction and network maintenance become moredifficult. In addition, more faults occur in the network. Hence, it is necessary to optimize sucha network. The purposes for optimizing the network are as follows:

l Improve the usage of network resources.

l Improve the safety and stability of the network.

l Increase the efficiency in network maintenance.

12.2 Principles for Optimizing the NetworkWhen optimizing the network, follow the basic principles.

Adhere to the following principles when optimizing the network:

l Fully use the investment in network to be optimized.

l Analyze the existing network and conclude the service trend.

l Apply a measurable optimization scheme.

l Apply proper measures to ensure that the network optimization can be performed.

12.3 Process for Optimizing a NetworkThe process for optimizing a network includes preparing the optimization, evaluating thenetwork, providing and analyzing network optimization schemes, and performing the networkoptimization.

Prepare for the OptimizationMake the following preparations before optimizing the network:

l Confirm the requirements for network optimization.

l Plan the scope, objects and date for network optimization.

l Determine the personnel responsible for optimizing the network.

l Collect documents about the network and analyze the network running condition.

l Prepare the tools for network optimization.

Evaluate the NetworkThe following operations should be performed to evaluate the network.

l Determine the purposes, objects, scope and date for network optimization.

l Determine the methods for evaluating the network optimization schemes.

12 Overview of Network OptimizationOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

12-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 197: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

l Collect in-field data and perform tests on site.

l Analyze the data, give marks and find the problem.

l Issue evaluation results and give optimization suggestions.

Provide and Analyze Network Optimization SchemesThe following operations should be done to provide and analyze network optimization schemes.

l Determine the nodes and objects for optimization.

l Provide schemes for optimizing different items as follows:– Operation environment

– Networking − Service optimization

– Network self-healing and protection

– Network clock

– Optical network spare parts

– Network security management

– Network ECC communication

– Other network optimization suggestions

l Provide an overall analysis of the network optimization and an overall network optimizationscheme.

l Provide verifications and tests for the overall scheme.

l Conclude and determine a network optimization scheme.

l Purchase devices, materials and related service items.

l Confirm the delivered devices and materials.

Perform the Network OptimizationThe following operations should be done to perform the network optimization.

l Determine a scheme for performing the network optimization.

l Determine the personnel responsible for performing the optimization, and the tools,vehicles, spare parts and emergency schemes.

l Perform the network optimization.

l Check and verify the network optimization.

l Make the network optimization process and results known to the people concerned.

l Conclude the optimization for each item and trace the optimization.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines 12 Overview of Network Optimization

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-3

Page 198: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05
Page 199: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

A Glossary

Numerics

1+1 protection A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one workingSNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge.

1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N workingSNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra trafficsignal.

100BASE-T Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local areanetwork.

10BASE-T Physical Layer specification for a 10 Mb/s CSMA/CD local areanetworkover two pairs of twisted-pair telephone wire.

A

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all, orsome subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal.The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from(extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.

APS Automatic Protection Switching. SDH switching mechanism that routestraffic from working paths to protect paths in case a line board failure orfibre cut occurs.

Asynchronous Protocol operation in which more than one exchange between a givenpair of entities can be handled simultaneously.

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which the informationis organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrenceof cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarilyperiodic. It is a protocol within the OSI layer 1. An ATM cell consists ofa 5 octet header followed by 48 octets of data.

Attenuation The attenuation is the rate of decrease of average optical power withrespect to distance along the fibre and is defined by the equation:

B

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines A Glossary

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

Page 200: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply thatminimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office.Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.

Broadcast The act of sending a frame addressed to all stations on the network

Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into the OSNseries products. That is, the OSN products can add and drop severalwavelengths directly.

C

CAR Committed Access Rate. The CAR limits the input or output transmissionrate on an interface.

CBR Constant Bit Rate. The Constant Bit Rate service category is used byconnections that request a static amount of bandwidth that is continuouslyavailable during the connection lifetime. This amount of bandwidth ischaracterized by a peak cell Rate (PCR) value.

CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance. Information sent in the forward andbackward direction to determine the upper bound of the toleranceadmitted for the time interval between cells pertaining to a given cellflow. The backward CDVT values included in the IAM and MOD shallbe interpreted as maximum acceptable values for the cell flow in thebackward direction.

Convergenceservice

A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in orderto provide for the specific requirements of the convergence service user.

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operationschannel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel(DCC) as its physical layer.

Encapsulation In 1000BASE-X, the process by which a MAC packet is enclosed withina PCS code-group stream

EPL Ethernet Private Line. An EPL service is a point-to-point interconnectionbetween two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transportbandwidth is never shared between different customers.

EPLn Ethernet Private LAN. A EPLn service is both a LAN service and aprivate service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between differentcustomers.

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line. A EVPL service is a service that is both aline service and a virtual private service.

EVPLn Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. A EVPLn service is aservice that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.

ESCON Enterprise System Connection. A path protocol which connects the hostwith various control units in an storage system. It is a serial bit streamtransmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.

A GlossaryOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 201: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

Ethernet A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers.It is a broadcast networking technology that can use several differentphysical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernetusually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernetnetworks.

F

FICON Fibre Connect. A new generation connection protocol which connects thehost with various control units. It carries single byte command protocolthrough the physical path of fibre channel, and provides higher rate andbetter performance than ESCON.

Frame A cyclic set of consecutive time slots in which the relative position ofeach time slot can be identified.

G

Gateway NE Gateway Network Element. Gateway NE provides the communicationsbetween NEs and network management system.

I

IP address A 32-bit identifier that is unique to each network device.

IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards andcontrols the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC meansthat the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) forcommunication.

Input jittertolerance

For STS-N electrical interfaces input jitter tolerance is the maximumamplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which whenmodulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more thantwo errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds areintegrated over successive 30 second measurement intervals.

L

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. A solution features flexiblebandwidth and dynamic adjustment. In addition, it provides a failuretolerance mechanism, which enhances the viability of virtualconcatenations and enables the dynamic adjustment to bandwidth (non-service affecting).

M

MAC Media Access Control. The data link sublayer that is responsible fortransferring data to and from the Physical Layer.

Multicast Transmission of a frame to stations specified by a group address.

Mean launchedpower

The mean launched power at reference point S is the average power of apseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fibre by the transmitter.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines A Glossary

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

Page 202: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching. Multi-protocol label switching. It is astandard routing and switching technology platform, capable ofsupporting various high level protocols and services. The datatransmission over an MPLS network is independent of route calculating.MPLS, as a connection-oriented transmission technology, guaranteesQoS effectively, supports various network level technologies, and isindependent of the link layer.

MSP Multiplex Section Protection. The MSP function provides capability forswitching a signal from a working to a protection section.

MSTP Multi-service transmission platform. It is based on the SDH platform,capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATMservices, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management ofthese services.

N

NE Network Element. A stand-alone physical entity that supports at leastnetwork element functions and may also support operations systemfunction or mediation functions. It contains managed objects, a messagecommunication function and a management applications function.

O

Orderwire It establishes the voice communication among the operators andmaintenance engineers work in each working station.

P

Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the buson the backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheadscan be passed through between the paired slots by using the directlyconnected overhead bus. When two SDH boards form an MSP ring, theboards need to be inserted in paired slots so that the K bytes can be passedthrough.

PCR Peak Cell Rate. An upper limit on the rate at which cells can be submittedon an ATM connection.

Protection subnet In the T2000, the protection subnet becomes a concept of network levelother than multiplex section rings or path protection rings. The protectionsub-network involves NEs and fibre cable connections.

PVC Permanent Virtual Connection. Traditional ATM Permanent VirtualConnection that is established/released upon a request initiated by amanagement request procedure (that is all nodes supporting theconnections need to be instructed by the network management).

Q

QoS Quality of Service. Information sent in the forward direction to indicatethe Quality of Service class requested by the user for a connection. QOSclasses are defined to allow a network to optimize resources in supportingvarious service classes.

A GlossaryOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 203: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

R

Receiversensitivity

Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value ofaverage received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.

Reference clock A clock of very high stability and accuracy that may be completelyautonomous and whose frequency serves as a basis of comparison for thefrequency of other clocks.

REG A device that performs regeneration.

RPR Resilient Packet Ring. A metropolitan area network (MAN) technologysupporting data transfer among stations interconnected in a dual-ringconfiguration.

S

SAN Storage Area Network. A dedicated high-speed data storage networkwhich interconnects multiple independent storage systems with multipleservers through fibre path switch or other switch equipment.

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transportstructures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloadsover physical transmission networks.

SNCP Subnet Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connection isreplaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the workingsubnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a requiredlevel.

SSM Synchronization Status Message. ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit thenetwork synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits ofthe multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types ofsynchronization quality grades.

T

TPS Tributary Protection Switching. A function provided by the equipment,is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standbytributary processing board.

V

VCC Virtual Channel Connection. That is a VC connection between two nodes.

VLAN Virtual local area network. A subset of the active topology of a BridgedLocal Area Network. Associated with each VLAN is a VLANIdentifier(VID).

VPN Virtual Private Network. Enables IP service to be transmitted securelyover a public TCP/IP network by encrypting all service from one networkto another.

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines A Glossary

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-5

Page 204: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05
Page 205: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

A

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B

BA Booster Amplifier

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply

BSS Base Station Subsystem

BWS Backbone WDM System

C

CAR Committed Access Rate

CBR Constant Bit Rate

CC Continuity Check

COA Case-Shape Optical Amplifier

CoS Class of Service

D

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCN Data Communication Network

DCU Dispersion Compensation Unit

DDN Digital Data Network

DNI Dual Node Interconnection

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-1

Page 206: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer

DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface

DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EMS Element Management System

EPL Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN

ES End System

ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection

ESD Electrostatic Discharge

ES-IS End System-Intermedia System

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

F

FC Fiber Channel

FE Fast Ethernet

FEC Forward Error Correction

FICON Fiber Connection

FTP File Transfer Protocol

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

H

HDLC High Level Data Link Control

I

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM

B Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

B-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 207: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

IP Internet Protocol

IS-IS Intermedia System-Intermedia System

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-TelecommunicationStandardization Sector

L

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D Channel

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

LB Loopback

LC Lucent Connector

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LSP Label Switch Path

M

MADM Multiple Add/Drop Multiplexer

MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MSTP Multiservice Transport Platform

N

NE Network Element

nrt-VBR Non-Real Time Variable Bit Rate

NSAP Network Service Access Point

O

OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

OCS Optical Core Switching

OSI Open Systems Interconnection

OSN Optical Switch Node

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

OTU Optical Transponder Unit

P

PA Pre-Amplifier

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-3

Page 208: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

PC Personal Computer

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

POS Packet over SDH

PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence

Q

QoS Quality of Service

R

RDI Remote Defect Indication

RNC Radio Network Controller

ROP Remote Optical Pumping

RPR Resilient Packet Ring

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

rt-VBR Real Time Variable Bit Rate

S

SAN Storage Area Network

SC Square Connector

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable

SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SSM Synchronization Status Message

STM Synchronous Transfer Mode

T

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TM Terminal Multiplexer

TPS Tributary Protection Switching

U

UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter

UBR Unspecified Bit Rate

V

VB Virtual Bridge

B Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Planning Guidelines

B-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15)

Page 209: 53244661-31400819-Planning-Guidelines-V100R007-05

VC Virtual Container

VCI Virtual Channel Identifier

VLAN Virtual LAN

VP Virtual Path

VPI Virtual Path Identifier

VPN Virtual Private Network

W

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemPlanning Guidelines B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-5